You are on page 1of 378

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Series 15 / 150 Model B


Connection Manual (Hardware)
GFZ-62073E/04

November 1998

GFL-001

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes


as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

Copyright 1998 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.


All Rights Reserved.

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

B62073E/04

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a danger of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

` Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s1

B62073E/04

Table of Contents

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1


1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
3. INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1

3.2
3.3
3.4

3.5

3.6

3.7

3.8

3.9

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.1
Cabinet Exterior Environmental Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
3.1.2
Installation Conditions of the CNC Inside Cabinet and Servo Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
POWER CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
CABINET DESIGN AND INSTALLATION CONDITIONS OF
THE MACHINE TOOL MAGNETIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
THERMAL DESIGN OF THE CABINET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.1
Temperature Rise within the Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.2
Cooling by Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.4.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
INSTALLING THE HEAT EXCHANGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.5.1
Cooling Fin A/B/C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.5.2
Heat Exchanger for CRT/MDI Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.5.3
The Heat Pipe Type Heat Exchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.5.3.1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
3.5.3.2 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ACTION AGAINST NOISE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.6.1
Separating Signal Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
3.6.2
Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
3.6.3
Grounding Each Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
3.6.4
Noise Suppressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.6.5
Cable Clamp and Shield Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.7.1
Configuration and Installation of the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
3.7.2
Battery for Memory Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
3.7.3
Replacing the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
CABLE LEADIN DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.8.1
Configuration of Control Unit Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
3.8.2
Cable Leadin for Standalone Cabinet A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3.8.3
Cable Leadin for Standalone Cabinet B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3.8.4
Cable Leadin for Additional Cabinet A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
MAINTENANCE AREA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.9.1
Maintenance Area for Selfstanding A Type Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3.9.2
Maintenance Area for Selfstanding B Type Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3.9.3
Maintenance Area for Additional Cabinet A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

4. TOTAL CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
4.1

CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB,


SERIES 150TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OF SERIAL SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.1.1
Connection Diagram for Series 15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, Series 150TB/MB/TTB
(When LCD/MDI Unit with Builtin Graphic Functions is not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
4.1.2
Connection Diagram for Series 15TB/TTB/MB
(When LCD/MDI Unit with Builtin Graphic Functions is Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
c1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

4.2
4.3

4.4
4.5
4.6

B62073E/04

CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB,


SERIES 150TB/MB/TTB (IN CASE OF ANALOG SPINDLE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15MB OR SERIES 150MB
(IN CASE OF MULTIPLE AXIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1
Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2
Additional Cabinet (In Case of Serial Spindle Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3
Additional Cabinet (In Case of Analog Spindle Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4
Connection Between the Control Unit and Additional Locker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15B (IN CASE OF MMCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR SERIES 15B (IN CASE OF MMCIII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION DIAGRAM FOR MMCIV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

80
83
84
85
86
88
89
91
92

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94


5.1
5.2

POWER SUPPLY UNIT PANEL LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95


CONNECTING THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.1
When an Input Unit is not Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.2.2
When an Input Unit is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.2.3
When AC Output Terminals for Which Power On/Off is Controlled are Insufficient . . . . . . . 103
5.2.4
Power ON Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.2.5
Power OFF Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.3
CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR STANDALONE CABINET A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.1
Input Unit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.2
Connection to Input Units (A14B0076B004, B005, and B008) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
5.3.3
Connection to the Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
5.4
CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR STANDALONE CABINET B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.4.1
Input Unit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.4.2
Connection to Input Unit (A14B0076B411) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.4.3
Connection to Control Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.5
CONNECTION OF INPUT UNIT FOR ADDITIONAL CABINET A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.5.1
Input Unit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.5.2
Cable Connection
[Connection to the Input Unit (A02B0075J141, J142, J144, and J145)] . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120


6.1
6.2

OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O LINK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.1
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Electric Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2.2
Connection of FANUC I/O Link by Optical Fiber Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3
CONNECTION OF THE FANUC I/O UNITMODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.1
Structure of FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.2
Outer Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.3
Mounting and Dismounting Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.4
Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.5
Connecting Input Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.6
Grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.7
Connecting Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.8
Connecting with I/O Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c2

121
123
125
126
131
131
132
132
134
135
136
138
141

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62073E/04

6.4

6.5

6.6

6.7

6.3.9
Digital Input/Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.10 Correspondence between I/O Signals and Addresses in a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3.11 Number of I/O Points for I/O UnitMODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTING THE CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1
Connecting Connection Unit 1 and Connection Unit 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.2
Input Signal Regulations for the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.3
Output Signal Regulations for the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.4
Connector Pin Assignment for the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.5
Details of the Connection between the Connection Unit and the Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.6
External View of the Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF OPERATORS PANEL CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1
Input Signal Regulations for the Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2
Output Signal Regulations for the Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.3
Connector Layout for Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.4
Details of the Connection between the Operators Panel Connection Unit and the Machine .
6.5.5
External View of Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF SOURCE OUTPUT OPERATORS PANEL CONNECTION UNIT . . . . . . .
6.6.1
Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit Input Signal Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.2
Output Signal Standard for Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.3
ALARM LEDs on Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.4
Connector Pin Assignment Addresses of Source Output
Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.5
Details of Machine Side Connections of Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit .
6.6.6
External Dimensions of Source Output Operators Panel Connection Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ADDRESSFIXED SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

143
145
145
147
149
151
153
154
156
174
175
176
177
179
181
188
189
190
192
195
197
199
206
207

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208


7.1

CRT/MDI UNIT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


7.1.1
Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
9 CRT or 9 PDP Display Interface (CE Marking Noncompliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
9 CRT or PDP Display Interface (CE Marking Compliant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
14 Analog CRT, 10.4 LCD, 9.5 LCD Display Interface
(CE Marking Compliant when MMCIV is not Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5
14 Analog CRT, 10.4 LCD, 9.5 LCD Display Interface
(CE Marking Compliant when MMCIV is Used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.6
10.4 LCD Display Interface (CE Marking Compliant with Builtin Graphic Function) . . . .
7.1.7
Adjusting the Flat Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.8
Interface between MMCIV Board and Option 1 Board (Video Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.9
Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.10 Small 9 Keyboard Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.11 Interface between MMCIII Board and Option 1 Board (Video Signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
I/O DEVICE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
RS232C Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
PPR Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3
Portable Tape Reader Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.4
FANUC Cassette Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.5
Connection with the FANUC Handy File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.6
Connection of Tape Reader Without Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.7
Connection of Tape Reader with Reels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.8
RS422 Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c3

209
209
214
216
218
220
222
224
225
226
227
228
229
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62073E/04

7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8

MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS232C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REMOTE BUFFER INTERFACE (RS422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HIGHSPEED DI SIGNAL INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CONNECTION OF REFERENCE POSITION APPROACH SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNC INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.1
DNC1 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.2
DNC2 Interface (RS232C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.8.3
DNC2 Interface (RS422) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9
SPINDLE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.1
Serial Spindle Interface (S Series Spindle) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.2
Serial Spindle Interface ( Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.3
Analog Spindle Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.9.4
Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10 SERVO INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.1 Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.2 Servo Amp Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.3 Serial Pulse Coder Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.4 Linear Scale Interface (A/B/Z Signal Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.5 Linear Scale Interface (Serial Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.6 APC Battery Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.10.7 Hybridcontrol Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.11
GENERALPURPOSE ANALOG VOLTAGE INPUT INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.12 CONNECTION BETWEEN THE SERIES 15B (MMCII) AND PERIPHERAL UNITS . . . . . .
7.13 CONNECTION WITH AN EXTERNAL DEVICE USING THE RS422 INTERFACE
FOR SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.14 CONNECTION WITH A PRINTER USING THE CENTRONICS INTERFACE
FOR FANUC SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.15 CONNECTION WITH AN EXTENSION ADAPTOR UNIT
FOR FANUC SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.16 CONNECTION WITH A HARD DISK UNIT FOR FANUC SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . . .
7.17 CONNECTION WITH A FLOPPY DISK UNIT FOR FANUC SERIES 15B (MMCII) . . . . . . .
7.18 RS232C SERIAL PORT (MMCIII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.19 OUTER HARD DISK INTERFACE (MMCIII) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238
240
242
244
247
248
248
250
251
252
254
255
256
257
259
259
260
263
269
271
272
273
274
275
277
279
281
283
287
290
292

8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

APPENDIX
A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
C. 20PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
D. ATTACHING THE CRT PROTECTIVE COVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
c4

1. GENERAL

B62073E/04

GENERAL

Contents of this manual

This manual describes the electrical and structural specifications required


for connecting the CNC control units, FANUC Series 15MODEL
B/Series 150MODEL B, with a machine tool, and covers the equipment
shown in the configuration diagram in Chapter 2. When using the CNC
control units, be sure to connect and install them following the
instructions in this manual. The manual outlines the units commonly used
for Fanuc CNC control units, that is, the I/O unit, servo motor, spindle
motor, and so on, and describes additional information on using these
units for the Series 15/150B. Refer to individual manuals for the
detailed specifications of each unit.
Multiple models of Series 15/150B products are provided so that they
correspond to various machine tools (lathe, machining center, etc.),
respectively. The description in this manual is common to these models.
Whenever each model has different restrictions, the abbreviation of the
model and notes are described. See the following table for the names and
abbreviations of the models described in this manual.

How this manual is


organized

This manual comprises the following chapters and appendix.


1. GENERAL
This chapter. It describes the outline and organization of this manual,
names of models applied and other related manuals.
2. CONFIGURATION
This chapter describes the configuration of the electrical system of the
machine tool with which the CNC is used.
3. INSTALLATION
This chapter describes how to install the CNC.
4. TOTAL CONNECTION
This chapter shows the connection diagrams for the CNC and each
device.
5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION
This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to the power supply
unit and input unit.
6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE
This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to the I/O unit to
machine interface.
1

1. GENERAL

B62073E/04

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS


This chapter describes the connection of the CNC to peripherals.
APPENDIX
This appendix contains an explanation of the CNC control unit,
external dimensions of the display apparatus and details on the 20pin
interface connectors and cables.

Applicable models

This manual can be used with the following models.


The abbreviated names may be used.
Product Name

Abbreviations

FANUC Series 15TB

15TB

FANUC Series 15TFB

15TFB

FANUC Series 15TEDMODEL B4

(*1)

15TED

FANUC Series 15TEEMODEL B4

(*1)

15TEE

FANUC Series 15TEFMODEL B4

(*1)

15TEF

FANUC Series 15MB

15MB

FANUC Series 15MFB

15MFB

FANUC Series 15MEKMODEL B4

(*1)

15MEK

FANUC Series 15MELMODEL B4

(*1)

15MEL

FANUC Series 15TTB

15TTB

FANUC Series 15TTFB

15TTFB

FANUC Series 150TB

150TB

FANUC Series 150TTB

150TTB

FANUC Series 150MB

150MB

Series 15B

Series 150B

(*1) With 15TED, 15TEE, and 15TEF, some options are not available.
Moreover, the following PC boards cannot be used:
D SubCPU board
D RISC board
D OSI ethernet board
(*2) The MMC board can be used only with the Series 150.
(*3) See FANUC MMC-IV Connection and Maintenance Manual
(B-62493E) for connection related to MMC-IV.

1. GENERAL

B62073E/04

Manuals related to
Series 15/150MODEL B

Manuals related to FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B are as follows.


This manual is marked with an asterisk (*).

List of manuals related to Series 15/150MODEL B


Specification
Number

Manual Name
FANUC Series 15TB/TFB/TTB/TTFB DESCRIPTIONS

B62072E

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center DESCRIPTIONS

B62082E

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL

B62073E

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (BMI Interface)

B62073E1

FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming)

B62554E

FANUC Series 15MODEL B For Lathe OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)

B62554E1

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATORS MANUAL (Programming)

B62564E

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B For Machining Center OPERATORS MANUAL (Operation)

B62564E1

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL

B62560E

FANUC Series 15/150MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL

B62075E

FANUC Series 15MODEL B DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Remote Buffer)

B62072E1

FANUC Series 15MODEL B PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Macro Compiler / Macro Executer)

B62073E2

PMC
FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language)

B61013E

FANUC PMCMODEL NB/NB2 PROGRAMMING MANUAL (Ladder Language)

B61863E

FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language)

B61013E2

FANUC PMCMODEL NB PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language)

B61863E1

FANUC PMCMODEL N/NA


PROGRAMMING MANUAL (C Language Tool Management Library)

B61013E4

Conversational Automatic Programming Function


CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER
(Series 15MF/MFB) PROGRAMMING MANUAL

B61263E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR MACHINING CENTER


(Series 15MF/MFB) OPERATORS MANUAL

B61264E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION FOR LATHE


(Series 15TF/TTF/TFB/TTFB) OPERATORS MANUAL

B61234E

CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING FUNCTION II FOR LATHE


(Series 15TFB/TTFB) OPERATORS MANUAL

B61804E2

Tracing / Digitizing
FANUC Series 15MB DESCRIPTIONS (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing)

B62472E

FANUC Series 15MB CONNECTION MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing)

B62473E

FANUC Series 15MB OPERATORS MANUAL (Supplement for Tracing / Digitizing)

B62474E

Gas, Laser Plasma Cutting Machine


FANUC Series 15MB DESCRIPTIONS (FOR GAS, LASER PLASMA CUTTING MACHINE)

B62082EN1

MultiTeaching Function
FANUC Series 15MB CONNECTION MANUAL (MultiTeaching Function)

B62083E1

Multipleaxis and Multiplepath Control Function


FANUC Series 15TTB OPERATORS MANUAL
(Supplement Explanations for Multipleaxis and Multiplepath Control Function)

B62074E1

2. CONFIGURATION

B62073E/04

CONFIGURATION

The following figure (see next page) shows the configuration of the
electrical system of the machine tool with which the Series 15B is used.
This manual describes how to connect the units illustrated in this diagram.
The machine tool body, machine operators panel, power magnetic
circuit, and sensor/actuator are specific to the machine tool and are the
builders responsibility. This manual does not cover the internal
connection of these units to the machine tool.
The numbers in parentheses shown in the diagram are section references
for this manual.

2. CONFIGURATION

B62073E/04

(6.4, 6.5, 6.6)

(6.2, 6.3,
6.4, 6.7)

(7.10)

(7.9)

NOTE
1 Refer to the FANUC I/O UnitModel A Connecting Maintenance Manual (B61813E). or the
FANUC I/O UnitModel B Connecting Manual (B62163E).
2 Refer to the FANUC AC Servo Motor series Descriptions (B65142E).
3 Refer to the FANUC AC Spindle Motor series Descriptions (B65152E).

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

INSTALLATION

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.1
ENVIRONMENTAL
REQUIREMENTS

3.1.1
Cabinet Exterior
Environmental
Requirements

The peripheral units, such as the control unit and CRT/MDI, have been
designed on the assumption that they are housed in closed cabinets. In
this manual cabinet refers to the following:
(1) Cabinet manufactured by the machine tool builder for housing the
control unit or peripheral units;
(2) Cabinet for housing the flexible turnkey system provided by FANUC;
(3) Operation pendant, manufactured by the machine tool builder, for
housing the CRT/MDI unit or operators panel ; or
(4) Equivalent to the above.
The environmental conditions when installing these cabinets shall
conform to the following table. Section 3.3 describes the installation and
design conditions of a cabinet satisfying these conditions.

Conditions

In operation

Ambient
temperature
around cabinet

In storage or
transportation

Change in
temperature

When a PCB
with internal
hard disk is not
mounted

When a PCB
with internal
hard disk is
mounted

0C to 45C

5C to 40C

20C to 60C
1.1C/minute
max.

0.3C/minute
max.

Normal

Relative humidity
75% or less, no
condensation
allowed

Relative humidity
10 to 75%, no
condensation
allowed

Temporary
(within one
month)

Relative humidity
95% or less, no
condensation
allowed

Relative humidity
10 to 90%, no
condensation
allowed

Humidity

Vibration

In operation

0.5 G or less

In storage or
transportation

1.0 G or less
Normal machine shop environment
(The environment must be
considered if the cabinets are in a
location where the concentration of
dust, coolant, and/or organic solvent
is relatively high.)

Environment

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.1.2
Installation Conditions
of the CNC Inside
Cabinet and Servo Unit

Ambient
temperature

In operation: 0 to 55C
(when a PCB with internal hard disk is not mounted)
In operation: 5 to 50C
(when a PCB with internal hard disk is mounted)
In storage and transportation: 20 to 60C

Humidity

Relative humidity: 95% or less, no condensation allowed


(when a PCB with internal hard disk is not mounted)
Relative humidity: 75% or less, no condensation allowed
(when a PCB with internal hard disk is mounted)

Vibration

In operation: 0.5 G or less

Environment

Coolant, lubricants and chips must not splash these units.

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.2
POWER CAPACITY

The power capacity of the CNC control unit, which in this section means
the specification required for the power supply, is obtained by adding the
power capacity of the control section and the power capacity of the servo
section.
The power capacity of the control section includes the power capacity of
the control unit, CRT/MDI, I/O unit, and operators panel interface.
When power supply Al is used.
Power capacity
ca acity of the
control section
When power supply BI is used.
Power capacity of the
Depends on servo motor type.
servo section

0.4 KVA
1 KVA

3. INSTALLATION

3.3
CABINET DESIGN
AND INSTALLATION
CONDITIONS OF THE
MACHINE TOOL
MAGNETIC

B62073E/04

When a cabinet is designed, it must satisfy the environmental conditions


described in Section 3.1. In addition, the magnetic interference on the
CRT screen, noise resistance, and maintenance requirements must be
considered. The cabinet is design must meet the following conditions :
(1) The cabinet must be fully closed.
The cabinet must be designed to prevent the entry of airborne dust,
coolant, and organic solvent.
(2) The cabinet must be designed to maintain a difference in temperature
of 10C or less between the air in the cabinet and the outside air as the
temperature in the cabinet increases.
See Section 3.4 for the details on thermal design of the cabinet.
(3) A closed cabinet must be equipped with a fan to circulate the air
within.
The fan must be adjusted so that the air moves at 0.5 m/sec along the
surface of each installed unit.
Caution: If the air blows directly from the fan to the unit, dust easily
abheres to the unit. This may cause the unit to fail.
(4) For the air to move easily, a clearance of 100 mm is required between
each unit and the wall of the cabinet.
(5) Packing materials must be used for the cable port and the door in
oreder to seal the cabinet.
Because the CRT unit uses a voltage of approximatery 11 KV to 20
KV, airborne dust gathers easily. If the cabinet is insufficiently sealed,
dust passes through the gap and abheres to the unit. This may cause
the insulation of the unit to deteriorate.
Acceptable packing materials:
D Epton sealer No. 686, Nitto Industry Co., Ltd.
D Polyurethane foam (ester) covered with vinyl chloride, Fuji
Rubber Co., Ltd.
(6) The CRT/MDI unit must be installed in a location where coolant
cannot be poured directly on it. The unit does have a dustproof front
panel.
The front panel of the CRT/MDI unit is dustproof. However, we do
not recommend installing the CRT/MDI unit in locations where
coolant directly splashes the front panel. Also, highvoltage is used
in the internal circuits of the CRT/MDI unit. Coolant entering the
CRT/MDI unit might cause serious trouble. The operation pendant
containing the cabinet and CRT/MDI unit is completely sealed, and
designed to prevent dirt, dust and coolant from entering. Pay particular
attention to preventing dust entering the CRT/MDI unit.
(7) Noise must be minimized.
As the machine and the CNC unit are reduced in size, the parts that
generate noise may be placed near noisesensitive parts in the
magnetics cabinet.
The CNC unit is built to protect it from external noise. Cabinet design
to minimize noise generation and to prevent it from being transmitted
to the CNC unit is necessary. See section 3.6 for details of noise
elimination/management.
(8) The units must be installed or arranged in the cabinet so that they are
easy to inspect and maintain.
10

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(9) The CRT screen can be distorted by magnetic interference.


Arranging magnetic sources must be done with care.
If magnetic sources (such as transformers, fan motors,
electromagnetic contactors, solenoids, and relays) are located near the
CRT display, they frequently distort the display screen. To prevent
this, the CRT display and the magnetic sources generatlly must be kept
300 mm apart. If the CRT display and the magnetic sources are not
300 mm apart, the screen distortion may be suppressed by changing
the direction in which the magnetic sources are installed.
The magnetic intensity is not constant, and it is often increased by
magnetic interference from multiple magnetic sources interacting
with each other. As a result, simply keeping the CRT and the magnetic
sources 300 mm apart may not be enough to prevent the distortion.
If they cannot be kept apart, or if the CRT screen remains distorted
despite the distance, it may be necessary to cover the screen with a
magnetic shield.
(10) The installation conditions of the I/O unit must be satisfied.
To obtain good ventilation in the module, the I/O unit must be installed
in the direction shown in the following figure. Clearances of 100 mm
or more both above and below the I/O unit are required for wiring and
ventilation.
Equipment radiating too much heat must not be put below the I/O unit.

Top
I/O base unit
(No screws or protrusions shall extend
from the bottom of this unit.)

Bottom

(11) If the CNC unit is installed at an elevation exceeding 1000 m, the upper
limit temperature of the CNC inside the cabinet at the environmental
conditions described in section 3.1 is subject to restrictions.
With each increase of 100 m above an elevation of 100 m, the upper
limit temperature is reduced by 1C.
Example) When the CNC unit is installed at an elevation of 1750 m,
the allowable upper limit temperature of the CNC inside
the cabinet is calculated as follows:
55C1750/100 1.0C+ 47.5C
Accordingly the allowable temperature range is 0C to
47.5C
When a PCB with builtin hard disk is used, the installation elevation
is restricted as follows:
Standard elevation when in operation:
60 to 3,000 m
Standard elevation when not in operation: 60 to 12,000 m
(12) In unspecified frequencies, the CNC control unit or the hard disk itself
may resonate. If this happens, resonation may cause acceleration
beyond the allowable limits of the devices. Full check this after
installing the CNC control unit in the machine tool.
11

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

NOTE
When a PCB with builtin hard disk is used, erroneous
operation or unexpected accidents may damage the data
stored on the hard disk even if the PCB is used under the
correct environment. To be extra sure, back up important
data from the hard disk.
If the power is turned OFF or a power interruption occurs
during accessing of the hard disk or while the operating
system is still running, data on the hard disk is more likely
to be damaged. Avoid this at all costs. Also, instruct the end
user to pay attention to this.

12

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.4
THERMAL DESIGN
OF THE CABINET

3.4.1
Temperature Rise
within the Cabinet

The purpose of the thermal design of the cabinet is to limit the difference
in temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10C
or less when the temperature in the cabinet increases.
The internal air temperature of the cabinet increases when the units and
parts installed in the cabinet generate heat. Since the generated heat is
radiated from the surface of the cabinet, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet and the outside air balance at certain heat levels. If the amount
of heat generated is constant, the larger the surface area of the cabinet, the
less the internal temperature rises. The thermal design of the cabinet
refers to calculating the heat generated in the cabinet, evaluating the
surface area of the cabinet, and enlarging that surface area by installing
heat exchangers in the cabinet, if necessary. Such a design method is
described in the following subsections.

The cooling capacity of a cabinet made of sheet metal is generally 6 W/C


per 1 m2 surface area, that is, when the 6 W heat source is contained in
a cabinet having a surface area of 1 m2, the temperature of the air in the
cabinet rises by 1C. In this case the surface area of the cabinet refers to
the area useful in cooling , that is, the area obtained by subtracting the area
of the cabinet touching the floor from the total surface area of the cabinet.
There are two preconditions : The air in the cabinet must be circuited by
the fun, and the temperature of the air in the cabinet must be almost
constant.
To calculate the increase in temperature inside the cabinet, the heat loss
of the units to be installed must be checked. Section 3.4.3 lists the heat
losses of the units provided by FANUC. The heat loss of all other parts
in the cabinet must also be added. Let the obtained total heat loss be P
[W].
The following expression must then be satisfied to limit the difference in
temperature between the air in the cabinet and the outside air to 10C or
less as the temperature in the cabinet rises:
Internal heat loss P [W]x 6 [W/m2C] surface area S [m2]
10 [C] of rise in temperature
For example, a cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 has a cooling capacity
of 24 W/C. To limit the internal temperature increase to 10C under
these conditions, the internal heat must not exceed 240 W. If the actual
internal heat is 320 W, however, the temperature in the cabinet rises by
13C or more. When this happens, the cooling capacity of the cabinet
must be improved using the heat exchanger described next.

3.4.2
Cooling by Heat
Exchanger

If the temperature rise cannot be limited to 10C by the cooling capacity


of the cabinet, a heat exchanger must be added. The heat exchanger
forcibly applies the air from both the inside and outside of the cabinet to
the cooling fin to obtain effective cooling. The heat exchanger enlarges
the surface area. Section 3.5 explains five heat exchangers supplied by
FANUC. Select one of these according to the application.
If cooling fin A is used for the cabinet, the total cooling capacity of a
cabinet having a surface area of 4 m2 in the example above is improved
as follows:
13

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

6 W/m2/C

4 m2) 9.1 W/C+ 33.1 W/C

The calculated value verifies that even if the internal heat is 320 W, the
temperature rise can be limited to less than 10C.
See Section 3.5 for installing the heat exchanger.

3.4.3
Heat Loss of Each Unit
Name
Control unit

Remarks

Basic unit (4 slots)

60W

Power supply AI

Basic unit (4 slots)

80W

Power supply BI

Basic unit (6 slots)

80W

Power supply BI

Basic unit (8 slots)

80W

Power supply BI

Main CPU board

20W

PMC board

18W

Sub board

18W

Option 1 board

15W

RISC Board

18W

Cannot be used on
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL

Buffer board (Multiple axis)

6W

AXES CPU (Multiple axis)

15W

MMCII CPU board

20W

Can be used only on series 150B

MMCII Graphic board

20W

Can be used only on series 150B

MMCIII CPU board

20W

Can be used only on series 150B

MMCIV CPU board

15W

Can be used only on series 150B

OSI/Ethernet board

18W

Cannot be used on
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL

Data server board

18W

HSSB interface board


CRT/MDI

Heat
loss

3W

Can be used only on series 150B

9 monochrome CRT/MDI

14W

For both small and standard type

9 color CRT/MDI

38W

For both small and standard type

9 monochrome PDP/MDI

20W

For both small and standard type

10.4 color LCD/MDI

20W

For both graphic function builtin type and MMCIV

9.5 color LCD/MDI

20W

14 color CRT/MDI

70W

9.5 LCD (monochrome STN)

10W

14

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Heat
loss

Name
Connection unit Connection unit 1

Remarks

35W

Connection unit 1+2

60W

Operators
panel

Operators panel connection unit

30W

I/O unit
model A

AIF01A, AIF01B

1.2W

AID32A, AID32B

1.2W) 0.23W number of ON points

AID16A, AID16B

0.1W) 0.21W number of ON points

AID32E, AID32F

0.1W) 0.23W number of ON points

BIF04A1

1.6W

AIF02C

1.2W

BID16A1, BID16B1

1.5W) 0.23 number of ON input points

BID16P1, BID16Q1

0.6W) 0.23 number of ON input points

BOA12A1

0.9W) (0.09 1.1 IL2) number of ON output points

BOD16A1

1.0W) (0.13+0.3 IL2) number of ON output points

BOD16P1

0.3W) (0.13+0.3 IL2) number of ON output points

BIA16P1

0.1W) 0.21 number of ON input points

BMD88A1, BMD88B1

1.3W) 0.23 number of ON input points)


(0.13) 0.3 IL2) number of ON output points

IL: load current


of output

BMD88P1, BMD88Q1

0.4W) 0.23 number of ON input points)


(0.13) 0.3 IL2) number of ON output points

MMCII

Hard disk unit

I/O unit
model B

26W

Panel mount type 3.5 floppy disk


unit

3W

Portable type 3.5 floppy disk unit

12W

Portable type 5.25 floppy disk unit

26W

Fullkey board unit

2W

Extention adapter unit

7W

Portable cassette streamer unit


Multitap transformer

24W
51W

See FANUC SERVO AMPLIFIER series DESCRIPTIONS


(B65162E) for heat loss of servo amplifier.

15

3. INSTALLATION

3.5
INSTALLING THE
HEAT EXCHANGER

B62073E/04

Table 3.5 lists the heat exchangers.


Cooling fins A, B and C are not provided with a fan. Note that a fan motor
is required for any of these cooling fins when it is used as a heat exchanger.
Table 3.5 List of heat exchangers
Ordering
specification

Cooling
capacity

Size

Cooling fin A

A02B0053K303

9.1 W/C

196 90 1000 mm

Cooling fin B

A02B0053K304

10.1 W/C

444 90 650 mm

Cooling fin C

A02B0053K305

25.2 W/C

560 90 970 mm

Heat exchanger for A02B0060K401


CRT/MDI unit

5.0 W/C

390 86 480 mm

Heat pipe type heat A02B0094C901


exchanger

9.0 W/C

226 132 415 mm

Name

3.5.1
Cooling Fin A/B/C

The cooling fin is shown below (Fig. 3.5.1 (a)). It is installed in a cabinet
made by the machine tool builder.

Viewed from cabinet mounting side

Fig. 3.5.1 (a) External view of cooling fin

16

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Cabinet

Cooling fin

Inside air
flow

Outside air
flow

Fig. 3.5.1 (b) Internal view of cooling fin

The cooling fin can be installed in two ways, as shown in Fig. 3.5.1 (b).
The following lists the general precautions to be observed when using the
cooling fins :
1) The fans are not included with the cooling fin. They should be
provided by the machine tool builder.
2) Bring in the outside air from the bottom and exhaust the hot air from
the top.
3) The inside air may flow from top to bottom or bottom to top. However,
generally decide the direction as follows :
a) Bring in the air near high heat loss components.
b) Exhaust the air toward the most important components to be
cooled.
4) For the cooling fin to display the specified cooling capacity, the air
inside the cooling fins must flow at a velocity of 2.5 m/sec or greater.
(velocity of air flow measurement)

Set the slit to the intake side and


measure the velocity at the slit.

5) Generally, install the cooling fins to the door. But be sure that the door
does not bend when installing the cooling fin. The cooling fins are
equipped with packing.

17

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

External dimensions

Fan mounting
plate
Terminal
block for fan
motor G04
(Attached to
the cooling fins.
Its height is 20
mm)

Mounting metals
for cooling fins
4M4
Mounting screw

Cooling fins

Fan motor

4M4
Mounting screw
for fan mounting plate

Door

Mounting metal
for cooling fins

Mounting metal
Mounting plate for cooling fins
(sheet metal
for fan motor
about 3 mm
thick).
Mounting diagram (example)

Panel cut drawing

Fig. 3.5.1 (c) External dimension mounting method of cooling fin A (A02B0053K303)

NOTE
1 Fan motor, mounting plate for fan motor and mounting metal
for cooling fins are not attached to the cooling fins.
So, prepare them at the machine tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 50 W power.
3 Weight: 6.5 kg

18

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

External dimensions
Mounting stud for cooling fins
(2 studs are attached top and bottom)
Mounting
hole for fan
motor
Fan motor

Cooling fins

66 dia.
Mounting hole
Mounting hole
for fan motor
4M4

Terminal block for fan motor G04


(Attached to the cooling fins.
Its height is 20 mm)

4M4
(Mounting hole
for fan motor)

Door

Mounting
plate for fan
motor

Mounting diagram (example)


Hole

External shape of
cooling fins.

Hole

66 dia hole or
M5 stud bolt
Stud hole
(Make a hole 5 dia
for fan motor)

Panel cut drawing

Fig. 3.5.1 (d) External dimension mounting method of cooling fin B (A02B0053K304)

NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate are not attached to the
cooling fins. So, prepare them, at the machine tool builder.
2 Use four fan motors with about 20 W power.
3 Weight: 7.5 kg

19

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Mounting stud for cooling fins

External dimensions

(Attached to the cooling fins)


Mounting plate
for fan motor
Terminal block
for fan motor
G04

Cooling fins

(Attached to
the cooling
fins.Its height
is 20 mm)

Fan motor

6M4
Mounting hole
for fan motor

86 dia.
Mounting hole
5M4
(Mounting hole
for fan motor)

Mounting
plate for fan
motor
Door

Mounting diagram (example)


External shape
of cooling fins.

66 dia hole or
M5 stud bolt

(This hole combines mounting


hole and stud
hole.)

Panel cut diagram

Fig. 3.5.1 (e) External dimension and mounting method of cooling fin C (A02B0053K305)

NOTE
1 Fan motor and mounting plate for fan motor are not
attached to the cooling fins. Prepare them at the machine
tool builder.
2 Use two fan motors with about 40 W power.
3 Weight: 13.5 kg

20

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.5.2
Heat Exchanger for
CRT/MDI Unit

hole

Lot
No.

Weight: 0.65 kg
External Dimensions of External
Cooling Fan

External Dimensions of
Finger Guard

Air inlet

Packing
Power terminal
M4 screw
AC200 V 50 Hz
AC200 V/220 V
60 Hz
48 W
Air outlet

Connector for external


cooling fan

Cooling fin: About 6 kg


(Excluding attached parts)

Fig. 3.5.2 (a) External dimensions of external cooling fan and cooling unit for CRT/MDI (A02B0060K401)

NOTE
External cooling fan and finger guard are attached beside
cooling fin.

21

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Heat exchanger

Outside

Inside

Air outlet

Air outlet

Main body
of heat
exchanger

(1)
Air inlet
Prepare mounting
screws and mounting panel.

External cooling fan (attached)


Finger guard (attached)

(1) Use M5 screws to mount the heat exchanger.


(2) Be careful with air flow when securing the external cooling fan.
(3) Prepare a mounting panel for external cooling fan and install
the panel where it can be exchanged externally.
(4) Drill mounting holes for external cooling fan and air outlet
on heat exchanger mounting panel.

Fig. 3.5.2 (b) Mounting methods of heat exchanger for CRT/MDI

22

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Horizontal type CRT/MDI only

Inside

Horizontal type CRT/MDI


and machine operators panel

Vertical type CRT/MDI only

Outside

Side view

CRT/MDI

370

Heat exchanger
Min
35

370

Min
35

Top view

Refer to these figures for allocation of CRT/MDI and heat exchanger.

Fig. 3.5.2 (c) Allocation of 14 color CRT/MDI and heat exchanger

23

370

Min
35

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.5.3
The Heat Pipe Type
Heat Exchanger
3.5.3.1
Installation

The heat pipe type heat exchanger is used for cooling the airtight cabinet
of small sized electronic devices. It is a compact, lightweight, and
heatefficient unit. Because the fan is builtin, it is used simply by
installing it, performing the panel cut operation.
(1) Specifications
Installation format
Fan
specifications

Cooling ability
(W/C)

Installation type in board


9 (50 Hz when operating)

Voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
Rating current (A)
Rating input (W)
Weight (kg)
Color

Order specifications Heat exchanger

200 VAC
50

60

0.28

0.24

28

26
4

Munsell signal N1.5

A02B0094C901

Remarks

D
D
D

A filter is installed on the outside air inhalation side.


The installation board thickness is the standard 1.6 t.
When a fan motor and filter are necessary for maintenance, prepare
them separately.
Fan motor specifications
A90L00010219#A
Filter specifications
A2500689X004
If the heat exchanger is installed near the CRT, screen distortion may
occur due to magnetic flux leakage from the fan motor.

24

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(2) External dimensions

Power source
terminal M4

AIR FLOW

External fan unit


Earth terminal
M4

Internal fan unit

AIR FLOW

(Installation board thickness)

Fig. 3.5.3.1 (a) External dimensions diagram of heat pipe type heat transformer

25

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(3) Panel cut dimensions

187.5

190

2.5

180

HOLE

190

175
3f 5
6f 6 or stud welder (M4)

214

Fig. 3.5.3.1 (b) External dimensions diagram of panel cut

(4) Installation method


Please install the heater exchanger by the following sequence:

Heat exchanger
main unit
Fan power cable
(detach the connector)
External fan unit

Installation screw B (1)

Installation screws A (2)


Earth cable
(if the installation screw on the fan side is
detached, it can be taken out.)
Installation screw
Installation panel

(Fig. 1)

Installation screw B (1)


(Fixed to the panel)

(Fig. 2)

26

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(a) Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.
(Fig. 1)
Detach the external fan unit installation screws A (2 pieces), take
out the unit from the main unit by sliding it down, and detach the
earth cable and the power cable to the fan. Also detach the
installation screw B (1 piece).
(b) Install the heat exchanger main unit in the installation section
which has been panel cut. (Fig. 2)
When fastening down the heat exchanger main unit with the
screws, first, temporarily secure the panel and the heat exchanger
main unit with the installation screw B, which was taken out in 1).
After that, secure the main unit by the installation screws. In this
case, the external fan unit installation screw holes should be
aligned with the main unit screw holes. (Please provide the
installation screws for the heat exchanger main unit.)
Because this product is composed of plastic, set the value shown
below for the screw tightening torque.
Heat exchanger main unit (M4 screw): 11 kgf.cm
External fan unit (M3 screw):
5 kgf.cm
(c) Connect the power cable and the earth cable to the external fan unit
(the unit detached in section 1), and secure the installation screw
A to the main unit from the outside.
The installation is now complete.

3.5.3.2
Maintenance

It is necessary to regularly clean the heat pipe type heat exchanger,


because the cooling ability is reduced by the accumulation of dust. The
frequency of the cleaning needed differs according to the installation
environment and therefore should be determined by your own judgment
regarding the amount of dirt.
(1) Air filter cleaning and replacement method
(a) When cleaning and replacing the filter, be sure to cut off the fans
electric power source.
(b) Detach the filter cover and take out the filter inside.

Detach the cover by pressing the flanges


which are in the grooves of both sides towards the inside using a flat blade screwdriver, etc.

27

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(c) Protect the filter from silting due to dust by blowing air on both
sides.

(d) When dirt is conspicuous, press wash with a neutral detergent, rinse
with clean water, and allow to dry naturally. When replacing,
replace with the same product.
(e) To install, insert the filter in the cover, align the flange in the
groove, and press. Confirm that the cover will not come loose even
if it is pulled.
(2) Cleaning heat exchanger
(a) When cleaning, be sure to cut off the fan power source.
(b) Take out the external fan unit from the heat exchanger main unit.

Heat exchanger
main unit
Power cable for fan
(detach the connector)

Detach the two installation


screws (A) of the external fan
unit, and detach the unit from
the main unit by sliding it
down. Detach the power
source cable to the fan and
the earth cable. Also detach
installation screws (B).
External fan unit

Installation screws A (2)


Earth cable (if the installation screw on the
Installation screws B (1) fan side is detached, it can be taken out)

(i) Cleaning fan unit


Wipe the dirt, condensation, etc., which has accumulated on the fan
motor and fan installation case with a dry cloth. When the
condensation, etc. has accumulated and the dirt is difficult to
remove, soak a cloth in neutral detergent, lightly squeeze it and
wipe away the dirt.
However, take care not to allow the detergent to enter the electrical
sections such as the internal rotor of the fan motor.

28

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(ii)Cleaning heat exchanger fan


Detach the heat exchanger from the unit and either blow off with
air, wipe off with a dry cloth, or brush the accumulated dirt,
condensation, etc.
When the dirt is especially severe
(1) Detach the internal fan unit, the terminal unit, and the cable
from the main unit.
Main unit

Terminal unit and cable

(2) Using a neutral detergent, remove the dirt from the main unit fan
section by brushing.
At this time, take care not to bend the fin of the element.
(3) After cleaning, dry well.
(iii)Installation
After completing cleaning of the fan unit and heat transformer.
(1) Install the terminal unit and cable in the original position.
(2) Install the fan unit in the original position. At this time, do not
forget to connect the fan power cable and the earth cable.

29

3. INSTALLATION

3.6
ACTION AGAINST
NOISE

3.6.1
Separating Signal
Lines

B62073E/04

The CNC has been steadily reduced in size using surfacemount and
custom LSI technologies for electronic components. The CNC also is
designed to be protected from external noise. However, it is difficult to
measure the level and frequency of noise quantitatively, and noise has
many uncertain factors. It is important to prevent both noise from being
generated and generated noise from being introduced into the CNC. This
precaution improves the stability of the CNC machine tool system.
The CNC component units are often installed close to the parts generating
noise in the power magnetics cabinet. Possible noise sources into the
CNC are capacitive coupling, electromagnetic induction, and ground
loops.
When designing the power magnetics cabinet, guard against noise in the
machine as described in Subsections 3.6.1 to 3.6.5.

The cables used for the CNC machine tool are classified as listed in the
following table:
Bind the cables in each group as described in the action column.
Group
A

Signal line

Action

Bind the cables in group A


separately (Note 1) from groups
Secondary AC power line
B and C or cover group A with
an electromagnetic shield (Note
AC/DC power lines (containing 2).
the power lines for the servo
and spindle motors)
See Section 3.6.4 and connect
spark killers or diodes with the
AC/DC solenoid
solenoid and relay.
Primary AC power line

AC/DC relay
B

DC solenoid (24 VDC)

Connect diodes with


solenoid and relay.
relay

DC

DC relay (24 VDC)


Bind the cables in group B
separately from group A or
cover group B with an
electromagnetic shield.
shield
DI/DO cable between the CNC Separate group B as far from
and power magnetics cabinet Group C as possible.
DI/DO cable between the CNC It is more desirable to cover
group B with the shield.
and machine

30

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Group
C

Signal line

Action

Cable between the CNC and Bind the cables in group C


separately from group A or
servo amplifier
cover group C with an
Cable for position and velocity electromagnetic shield.
feedback
Cable between the CNC and
spindle amplifier
Cable for the position coder

Separate group C as far from


Group B as possible.

Cable for the manual pulse Be sure to perform shield


generator
processing
g in Section 3.6.5.
Cable between the CRT and
MDI
RS232C and RS422 interface
cables
Cable for the battery
Other cables to be covered with
the shield

NOTE
1 The groups must be 10 cm or more apart from one another
when binding the cables in each group.
2 The electromagnetic shield refers to shielding between
groups with grounded steel plates.

3.6.2

The following ground systems are provided for the CNC machine tool:

Ground

(1) Signal ground system (SG)


The signal ground (SG) supplies the reference voltage (0 V) of the
electrical signal system to the machine.
(2) Frame ground system (FG)
The frame ground system (FG) is used for safety, and suppressing
external and internal noises. In the frame ground system, the frames
and cases of the units, panels, and shields for the interface cables
between the units are connected.
(3) System ground system
The system ground system is used to connect the frame ground
systems connected between devices or units with the ground.

31

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Signal ground system


Frame ground system
Power
magnetics
unit

Servo
amplifier

System ground system

CNC
control unit

Operators panel

Machine tool

Power
magnetics
cabinet

Distribution board

WARNING
Notes on connecting the ground systems
D Connect the signal ground with the frame ground (FG) at
only one place in the CNC control unit.
D The grounding resistance of the system ground shall be 100
ohms or less (class 3 grounding).
D The system ground cable must have enough
crosssectional area to safely carry the accidental current
flow into the system ground when an accident such as a
short circuit occurs.
(Generally, it must have the crosssectional area of the AC
power cable or more.)
D Use the cable containing the AC power wire and the system
ground wire so that power is supplied with the ground wire
connected.

32

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.6.3

(a) Control unit

Grounding Each Unit


Control unit

PCB
Signal
ground (SG)
SG
M4
(Only thread
hole)

M3

M3
(With thread)

Ground cable
Wire with a sectional
area 2 mm2 or more

Ground cable

Ground plate of
the cabinet

System ground

Connect the 0 V line of the electronic circuit in the control unit with the
ground plate of the cabinet via the signal ground (SG) terminal.

33

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(b) CRT unit


M5 stud

(Rear side)

f
14CRT

M4 stud

(Rear side)

9 PDP
9 CRT
9.5 LCD
10.4 LCD

(c) Connection unit 1/2

M4 screw

(d) Operators panel connection unit

34

Ground install board

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(e) Tape raeder unit


(Rear side)

(Rear side)

f
f

M5 stud

Tape reader with reel

Tape reader without reel

(f) I/O Unit model A

Ground the terminals for (ABU05A, ABU05B, ABU10A, ABU10B)


ABU05A, ABU10A

ABU05B, ABU10B

M4 terminal
for ground

M3 terminal
for ground (SG)
M4 mount hole
for ground

NOTE
Ground SG terminal to the mount hole.

35

M5 stud

3. INSTALLATION

3.6.4
Noise Suppressor

B62073E/04

The AC/DC solenoid and relay are used in the power magnetics cabinet.
A high pulse voltage is caused by coil inductance when these devices are
turned on or off.
This pulse voltage induced through the cable causes the electronic circuits
to be disturbed.
To reduce the pulse voltage, use a spark killer for an AC device or a diode
for a DC device.
Notes on selecting the spark killer

Use a spark killer consisting of a resistor and capacitor in series. This


type of spark killer is called a CR spark killer.
(A varistor is useful in clamping the peak voltage of the pulse voltage,
but cannot suppress the sudden rise of the pulse voltage. FANUC
therefore recommends a CR spark killer.)
The reference capacitance and resistance of the spark killer shall
conform to the following based on the current (I (A)) and DC
resistance of the stationary coil:
1) Resistance (R): Equivalent to DC resistance of the coil
2
2
2) Capacitance (C): 1 to 1 (mF)

10

20

Equivalent circuit of thespark killer

Spark killer
AC relay

Motor

Spark killer

36

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Cable Clamp and


Shield Processing

The CNC cables that require shielding should be clamped by the method
shown below. This cable clamp treatment is for both cable support and
proper grounding of the shield. To insure stable CNC system operation,
follow this cable clamp method.
Partially peel out the sheath and expose the shield. Push and clamp by
the plate metal fittings for clamp at the part. Metal fittings for clamp are
attached to the control unit. The ground plate must be made by the
machine tool builder, and set as follows :
Ground plate

Cable
Metal fittings for clamp

40 mm to 80 mm

3.6.5

Fig. 3.6.5 (a) Cable clamp (1)

37

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Machine side
installation
board
Control Rack

Ground plate

Metal fittings
for clamp
Shield cover

Fig. 3.6.5 (b) Cable clamp (2)

Prepare ground plate like the following figure.

Ground terminal
(grounded)

Hole for securing metal fitting clamp


Mount screw hole

Fig. 3.6.5 (c) Ground plate

For the ground plate, use a metal plate of 2 mm or thicker, which surface
is plated with nickel.

38

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Ground plate

8mm

12mm

20mm

Fig. 3.6.5 (d) Ground plate holes Ground plate

(Reference) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp.


Max. 55mm

28mm

6mm

17mm

Fig. 3.6.5 (e) Outer drawings of metal fittings for clamp

Ordering specification for metal fittings for clamp


A02B0118K001 (5 pieces)
NOTE
Select cables of appropriate length.
We do not recommend using cables longer than necessary.
Such cables may demonstrate poor resistance to electrical
noise or be influenced by electrical noise. Also, if excess
cable is wrapped up in a coil, this may increase impedance.
This may induce an extremely high voltage during ON/OFF
switching of signals, or lead to erroneous operation caused
by malfunction or electrical noise.

39

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.7
CONTROL UNIT
3.7.1

Printed circuit boards used for control of Series 15B is mounted in a rack
equipped with several slots.

Configuration and
Installation of the
Control Unit

Option board

Optionboard

Option board

Option 1
board

Option board
RISC
MMCII
MMCII
Graphic
MMCIII
MMCIV
OSI ethernet

Graphic display control

Sub board

Communication control
(Remote
buffer)
(DNC 1)

Main CPU
board

PMC board

SUB CPU

CNC CPU

PMC CPU
I/O LINK
Memory Card

4axis control
spindle ( 2)
Analog I/O
HDI 4
RS232C
RS422

4axis control
spindle ( 2)
CRT/MDI
RS232C 2
HDI 4
MPG 3

Power supply
unit
ON/OFF
control

Power
supply unit

Conversion
control

AI or BI

FBUS

OPTION

BASIC

MAIN PMC PSU


CPU

MAIN PMC PSU


CPU

MAIN PMC PSU


CPU

MAIN PMC PSU


CPU

Fig. 3.7.1 (a) Control unit configuration of Series 15B

NOTE
The SUB CPU, RISC, MMC and OSI/Ethernet boards cannot be used on the
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

40

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

Option board

Option board

Option board

Option board
RISC
MMCII
MMCII
Graphic
MMCIII
MMCIV
OSI ethernet

Option 1
board

Graphic display
control

Communication control
(Remote buffer)
(DNC 1)

Sub CPU
board

Main CPU
board

PMC board

SUB CPU

CNC CPU

PMC CPU
I/O LINK
Memory Card

Analog input
HDI 4
RS232C
RS422

CRT/MDI
RS232Cx2
HDIx4
MPGx3

Power supply
unit

ON/OFF
control

Power
supply unit

Conversion
control

AI or BI

FBUS

OPTION

BASIC

SUB MAIN PMC PSU


CPU CPU

SUB MAIN PMC PSU


CPU CPU

SUB MAIN PMC PSU


CPU CPU

Fig. 3.7.1 (b) Control unit configuration of Series 15B (Multiple axis)

NOTE
The SUB CPU, RISC, MMC and OSI/Ethernet boards cannot be used on the
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

41

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04


AXES CPU
board

AXES CPU

Buffer board

Buffer

4axis control
spindle ( 2)
Near zero
MPG 3

AXES CPU
board

Power
supplyy unit

AXES CPU

ON/OFF
control

4axis control
spindle ( 2)
Near zero

Power
supply unit
AI or BI

OPTION

BUF AXES PSU


FER CPU

BASIC

BUF AXES PSU


FER CPU

BUF AXES PSU


FER CPU

Fig. 3.7.1 (c) Configuration of Series 15B additional locker used with multiaxis machines

NOTE
More than one axis CPU board may be used, depending on
the system configuration.

The rack consists of a plastic box, fan motors and a backplane PCB. Since
the rack is provided with builtin fan motors, it does not require the
external air flow conditions described in Section 3.5. The air comes into
the rack from the bottom and goes out through the fan motor, which is
located on the top of the rack. Space as shown in Fig. 3.7.1 (d) must be
reserved not to disturb the air flow ((A), (B))
The backplane PCB, which is located on the rear side of the rack,
interconnects the PCBs installed in the rack. It has another connector
which appears at the left side panel of the rack. The connector may be used
in the future. The space (C) for this shall be reserved as shown in Fig.
3.7.1 (d).
42

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

AIR FLOW

AIR FLOW

50

250

50
30
172

Fig. 3.7.1 (d)

43

unit [mm]

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.7.2
Battery for Memory
Backup

WARNING

The part program, offset data and system parameters are stored in the
CMOS memory of the control unit and they are retained even while the
main power is cut off. The power of the memory is backed up by a lithium
battery which is mounted on the front panel of the power supply unit. Data
is retained even while the main power is OFF. The control unit is shipped
from the factory equipped with the battery.
Replace the battery within one week after the BAT warning message is
displayed blinking on the CRT screen indicating lower battery power, or
when the battery alarm signal is output to the PMC. Otherwise, data in
memory will be lost.
A lithium battery is used for the battery. Follow the following
precautions.
WARNING
Incorrect replacement of the battery may cause an
explosion.
Replace only with the specified battery.

Power Supply
Unit front panel

Battery
Compartment

Battery inside

Fig. 3.7.2

NOTE
The part program, parameters and variables are stored to
nonvolatile memory in the CNC unit. Normally, turning the
power ON and OFF will not cause data in memory to be lost.
However, it is conceivable that erroneous operation may
delete data, or important data stored in nonvolatile may
have to be deleted to restore trouble.
We recommend backing up data beforehand so that the
system can be restored quickly in the event that unexpected
trouble occurs.

44

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.7.3
Replacing the Battery

WARNING

Before you replace the battery, turn the machine tool (CNC) ON and make
an emergency stop.
Replacing the battery involves opening the cabinet with the power still
ON. So, only personnel trained in maintenance and safety procedures may
replace batteries.
When you open the cabinet to replace the battery, do not touch
mark and covered with
highvoltage circuits indicated by the
antielectric shock covers.
If the cover becomes loose and you touch a highvoltage circuit, you will
be electrocuted.

(1) Use a lithium battery.


When using battery unit A02B0162H101 or H102
Ordering drawing number: A02B0120K106
When using battery unit A02B0162H107 or H108
Ordering drawing number: A02B0200K102
(2) Turn on the 15B.
(3) Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power supply unit.
The case can be removed easily by holding the top and bottom of it and
pulling.

Front panel of the


power supply unit

Battery case

Battery

Fig. 3.7.3 (a) Replacing the battery (1)

45

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(4) Remove the connector from the battery.

BATTERY
Cable connector

PC board
connector
Battery

Front panel of hte


power supply unit

Fig. 3.7.3 (b) Replacing the battery (2)

(5) Replace the battery and reconnect the connector.


(6) Install the battery case.
(7) Turn off the Series 15B.

46

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.8
CABLE LEADIN
DIAGRAM
3.8.1
Configuration of
Control Unit
Connectors
unit [mm]

Power supply
unit

Fig. 3.8.1 (a)

(1) Above diagram shows the grid of connector location.


Control board may not have all connectors as shown above.
For actual connector layout of each board, please see the connector
layout diagrams in Fig. 3.8.1 (c) (s).

47

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

(2) For the power supply unit, please see Fig. 3.8.1 (b1) and (b2).

Minislot

unit [mm]

Fig. 3.8.1 (b1) Power unit connector layout


For power unit A02B0162H101 and H102

48

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

unit [mm]

Fig. 3.8.1 (b2) Power unit connector layout


For power unit A02B0162H107 and H108

49

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

FUNCTION

POS.

LED INDICATORS
MEMORY CARD I/F

SERIAL I/O LINK

IOLINK

Fig. 3.8.1 (c) PMC board

50

JD1A

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

FUNCTION

POS.

LED INDICATORS
CRT DISPLAY
MDI
SERIAL PORT 1
SERIAL PORT 2
MPG
HIGH SPEED DI1
SERIAL SPINDLE 1
(POSITION CODER1)
ANALOG OUT
APC BATTERY
SERVO AMP 1
SERVO AMP 2
SERVO AMP 3
SERVO AMP 4
PULSE CODER 1
PULSE CODER 2
PULSE CODER 3
PULSE CODER 4
LINEAR SCALE 1
LINEAR SCALE 2
LINEAR SCALE 3
LINEAR SCALE 4

SPDL-1

JA7A

APCBAT

JA4A

Fig. 3.8.1 (d) Main CPU board

51

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

FUNCTION
LED INDICATORS
POS.
SERIAL PORT 9
SERIAL PORT 4
HIGH SPEED DI2
ANALOG INPUT
POSITION CODER2
ANALOG OUT2
APC BATTERY
SERVO AMP 5
SERVO AMP 6
SERVO AMP 7
SERVO AMP 8
PULSE CODER 5
PULSE CODER 6
PULSE CODER 7
PULSE CODER 8
LINEAR SCALE 5
LINEAR SCALE 6
LINEAR SCALE 7
LINEAR SCALE 8

Fig. 3.8.1 (e) SUB board

52

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

FUNCTION

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

LED INDICATORS
CRT DISPLAY
RS232C PORT3
RS422 PORT1

POS.

With only
graphic
function

With graphic
function and
communication
function

With only
communication
function

Fig. 3.8.1 (f) Option 1 board

NOTE
The communication function refers to the remote buffer
function or DNC1 function.

53

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

FUNCTION
LEDs
POS.
Hard disk interface

Floppy disk interface

Graphic bus

Keyboard interface
RS422 interface
Centronics interface
RS232C interface, channel 1
RS232C interface, channel 2

Fig. 3.8.1 (g) MMCII CPU board

NOTE
The MMCII CPU (A02B0120J202), which requires
three RS232C channels, uses JD6 as an RS232C port.

54

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

FUNCTION
LEDs
POS.

Graphic bus

CRT interface
Not used

Fig. 3.8.1 (h) MMCII graphic board

55

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

FUNCTION

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

LEDs
POS.

VIDEO output (CNC side)


Video input
Serial port 6
Serial port 7
Serial port 8

Fig. 3.8.1 (i) MMCIII CPU board

56

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

FUNCTION

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

LEDs
POS.

CRT I/F
MDI I/F
Serial bort 1
Serial bort 2
Manual pulse generator I/F
High DI I/F

Battery backup for


board replacement
Multiple axisBus

Fig. 3.8.1 (j) Multiple main CPU board

57

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

FUNCTION

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

LEDs
POS.

Serial port 9
Serial port 4

High speed DI I/F


Analog input

Fig. 3.8.1 (k) Multiple SUB CPU board

58

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

FUNCTION

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

LEDs
POS.
Operation check input 1
Operation check input 2
Operation check input 3
Operation check input 4
Near zero input
Serial spindle 2
Analog spindle 2
APC Battery

Servo amplifier 1
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 4
Pulse coder 1
Pulse coder 2
Pulse coder 3
Pulse coder 4
Linear scale 1
Linear scale 2
Linear scale 3
Linear scale 4

Fig. 3.8.1 (l) AXIS CPU board

59

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

FUNCTION

UPPER LINE LOWER LINE


MARKING
MARKING

LEDs
POS.

Multiple axisBus

Fig. 3.8.1 (m) Multiple buffer board

60

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

POS. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

UPPER LINE
MARKING

FUNCTION

LOWER LINE
MARKING

LEDs

STATUS/ALARM

LEDs

LV ALM

Fuse

F21 5A

Fig. 3.8.1 (n) RISC board

NOTE
The
RISC board cannot be
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

61

used

on

the

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

UPPER LINE
MARKING

FUNCTION

LOWER LINE
MARKING

LEDs

STATUS/ALARM

NC Video signal input

NC CRT

JA1B

Video signal output

CRT

JA1A

Serial port 1

R2321

JD5F

Serial port 2

R2322

JD5G

LCD adjustment

LCD ADJUST

Floppy disk drive

FDD

JD8

11

Parallel keyboard

CENTRO

JD9

12

Full keyboard

KEYBOARD

CD32A

LEDs
LEDs
LEDs
Battery

AL4 (FUSE)
AL5 (POWER)
AL6 (BATTERY)
BATTERY
BAT2

Mouse

MOUSE

POS. 1

7
8
9

10

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

CD32B

Fig. 3.8.1 (o) MMCIV board

NOTE
The MMCIV board cannot be
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

62

used

on

the

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

POS. 1
2

UPPER LINE
MARKING

FUNCTION

LOWER LINE
MARKING

LEDs

STATUS/ALARM

Fuse

F1

2.0A

10BASE2 I/F

10BASE2

CNX

Switch

LOAD

Switch

RESTART

Serial port

RS232C

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
11

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

CD29

19
20
21

Fig. 3.8.1 (p) OSI/Ethernet board (10BASE2)

NOTE
The OSI/Ethernet board cannot be
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

63

used

on

the

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

POS. 1
2

UPPER LINE
MARKING

FUNCTION

LOWER LINE
MARKING

LEDs

STATUS/ALARM

Fuse

F1

2.0A

AUI I/F

AUI

CD27

Switch

LOAD

Switch

RESTART

Serial port

RS232C

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
11

12
13
14
15
16
17
18

CD29

19
20
21

Fig. 3.8.1 (q) OSI/Ethernet board (10BASE5)

NOTE
The OSI/Ethernet board cannot be
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

64

used

on

the

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

POS.1
2

UPPER LINE
MARKING

FUNCTION

LOWER LINE
MARKING

LEDs

STATUS/ALARM

Fuse

F1

2.0A

Ethernet interface

AUI

CD27

Bultin HDD access lamp

HDD

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

10
11

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Fig. 3.8.1 (r) Data server board

65

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

FUNCTION

UPPER LINE
MARKING

LEDs

LOWER LINE LEFT LINE


MARKING
MARKING

RIGHT LINE
MARKING

STATUS

Rotary switch

SW

LEDs

AL

Highspeed serial bus interface

HSSB

Mini slot interface

JNAM

COP7

Fig. 3.8.1 (s) HSSB interface board

66

21

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.8.2
Cable Leadin for
Standalone Cabinet A

67

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.8.3
Cable Leadin for
Standalone Cabinet B

68

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.8.4
Cable Leadin for
Additional Cabinet A

69

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.9
MAINTENANCE
AREA
3.9.1
Maintenance Area for
Selfstanding A Type
Cabinet

About

About 130

70

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.9.2
Maintenance Area for
Selfstanding B Type
Cabinet

About

About 130

71

3. INSTALLATION

B62073E/04

3.9.3
Maintenance Area for
Additional Cabinet A

About

About

72

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

TOTAL CONNECTION

73

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

4.1
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES
15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/
TTFB/MFB, SERIES
150TB/MB/TTB
(IN CASE OF SERIAL
SPINDLE)
4.1.1
Connection Diagram
for Series
15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/
TTFB/MFB, Series
150TB/MB/TTB
(When LCD/MDI Unit
with Builtin Graphic
Functions is not Used)

74

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

Power supply
ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6)
PMC BOARD

MEM CARD
(ICMC)
IOLINK(JD1A)

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T

AC200V240V POWER

ON/OFF

MEMORY
CARD

JD1A
JD1B
CP32

FANUC I/O Link

POWER
MAGNETICS

I/O Unit
MODELA

24VDC

MPG

HIGHSPEED DI 4

APC BATTERY

6V

SERIAL

CN11A

INTERFACE

CN11B

SPINDLE

1ST SERVO
AMP

CN1

SCALE1(JF21)

T1

SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC

EMERGENCY STOP

AC100V
AC200V

1ST SERVO
MOTOR
SERIAL PULSE CODER

2ND SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

3RD SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

4TH SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

75

POSITION
CODER

SERIES CN2
CN13

To 2ND AMP

AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)

OPERATORS
PANEL

: :

RS232C I/O DEVICE

SPDL1(JA7A)

ENC1(JF1)

CP61 OP PANEL
JD1A INTERFACE
JD1B UNIT

HDI1(JA5A)

AMP1(JV1)

CN2
CRT/MDI
UNIT
CN1
CNK1

+24V WHEN 9 MONOCHROME CRT

MAIN CPU
CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)
R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)

APCBAT(JA4A)

SCALE

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

SUB BOARD
R2329(JD5J)

R4224(JD6D)
AIN(JA6)

ANALOG I/O

HDI2(JA5B)

RS232C
I/O DEVICE
RS422
I/O DEVICE

HIGH SPEED DI

SPDL2(JA7B)
ASPDL2(JA8B)

APC BATTERY
APCBAT(JA4B)
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T

AMP1(JV5)
ENC1(JF5)

6V

5TH SERVO
T1
AMP

CN1

EMERGENCY STOP

5TH SERVO
MOTOR
SERIAL PULSE
CODER

SCALE1(JF25)
AMP2(JV6)
ENC2(JF6)
SCALE2(JF26)
AMP3(JV7)
ENC3(JF7)
SCALE3(JF27)
AMP4(JV8)
ENC4(JF8)
SCALE4(JF28)

AC100V
AC200V

SCALE

6TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

7TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

8TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

OPTION 1

To CRT (In case of graphic display)

CRT(JA1)
RS2323(JD5C)

REMOTE BUFFER (RS232C)

RS4221(JD6A)

REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS422/RS485)

PCR 20 connector (20 pins)


PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
AMP connector
Others

NOTE
Some connections in the above diagram may not be
provided, depending on the system configuration.

76

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

4.1.2
Connection Diagram
for Series
15TB/TTB/MB
(When LCD/MDI Unit
with Builtin Graphic
Functions is Used)

77

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

POWER SUPPLY
AC200V240V POWER

ACIN (CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6)

JA2
ON/OFF
CP5
LCD with
JN1
graphic
function

PMC BOARD

MEM CARD
(CNMC)
IOLINK
(JD1A)

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T

MAIN CPU
CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)
R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)
HDI1(JA5A)

MEMORY
CARD
FANUC I/O Link

(JA4A)
AMP1(JV1)
ENC1(JF1)

SCALE1

AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)

CP61 OP PANEL
JD1A INTERFACE
JD1B UNIT
JD1A
JD1B
CP32

OPERATORS
PANEL

::

POWER
MAGNETICS

I/O Unit
MODELA

RS232C I/O DEVICE


MPG
HIGH SPEED DI
SERIES CN2
SERIAL
JA7B INTERFACE
JA7A SPINDLE

APC BATTERY

1ST SERVO AMP


T1

6V

3
POSITION
CODER
SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC

2ND AMP

CN1

EMERGENCY STOP
AC100V
AC200V
1ST SERVO
MOTOR
SERIAL PULSE CODER
SCALE

(JF21)
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)

CNK1

24VDC

SPDL1(JA7A)

APCBAT

CNK2

MDI

2ND SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

3RD SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

4TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

78

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

SUB BOARD

R2329(JD5J)

RS232C I/O DEVICE

R4224(JD6D)
AIN(JA6)
HDI2 (JA5B)

RS422 I/O DEVICE


ANALOG I/O

HIGH SPEED DI

SPDL2 (JA7B)

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T

ASPDL2

(JA8B)

APCBAT

(JA4B)
AMP1(JV5 )
ENC1(JF5 )
SCALE1

EMERGENCY STOP
APC BATTERY
5TH
SERVO AMP

6V

AC100V
AC200V

T1

5TH SERVO
MOTOR

CN1

SERIAL PULSE
CODER
SCALE

(JF25)
AMP2(JV6 )
ENC2(JF6 )

6TH AXIS
SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

SCALE2(JF26)
AMP3(JV7 )
ENC3(JF7 )

7TH AXIS
SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

SCALE3(JF27)
AMP4(JV8 )
ENC4(JF8 )

8TH AXIS
SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

SCALE4(JF28)

PCR 20 connector (20 pins)


PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
AMP connector
Others

NOTE
Some connections in the above diagram may not be
provided, depending on the system configuration.

79

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

4.2
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES
15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/
TTFB/MFB, SERIES
150TB/MB/TTB
(IN CASE OF
ANALOG SPINDLE)

80

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

POWER SUPPLY

AC200V240V
POWER

ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6)

IOLINK
(JD1A)

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T

MAIN CPU
CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)
R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)
HDI1(JA5A)

SPDL1(JA7A)
ASPDL1(JA8A)
APCBAT(JA4A)
AMP1(JV1)
ENC1(JF1)

SCALE1(JF21)
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)

CP61
JD1A
JD1B

MEM CARD
(CNMC)

MEMORY
CARD

JD1A
JD1B
CP32

FANUC I/O Link

+24V WHEN 9
MONOCHROME CRT

PMC BOARD

ON/OFF
CN2
CRT/MDI
CN1
UNIT
CNK1

OP PANEL
INTERFACE
UNIT

::

I/O Unit
MODELA

OPERATORS
PANEL

POWER
MAGNETICS
24VDC

RS232C I/O DEVICE

MPG
HIGH SPEED DI 4
CN2

ANALOG
INTERFACE
SPINDLE

APC BATTERY

1ST
SERVO AMP

6V

CN1

POSITION
CODER
SPINDLE
MOTOR

T1

200VAC
EMERGENCY STOP
100VAC
200VAC
1ST SERVO
MOTOR
SERIAL PULSE
CODER
SCALE

2ND SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

3RD SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

4TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

81

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

SUB BOARD
R2329(JD5J)
R4224(JD6D)
AIN(JA6)
HDI2(JA5B)

SPDL2(JA7B)

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

ASPDL2(JA8B)

APCBAT(JA4B)
AMP1(JV5)
ENC1(JF5)

U
N
I
T

SCALE1(JF25)
AMP2(JV6)
ENC2(JF6)
SCALE2(JF26)
AMP3(JV7)
ENC3(JF7)
SCALE3(JF27)
AMP4(JV8)
ENC4(JF8)
SCALE4(JF28)
OPTION1
CRT(JA1)
RS2323(JD5C)
RS4221(JD6A)

B62073E/04

RS232C I/O DEVICE


RS422 I/O DEVICE
ANALOG I/O 4
HIGH SPEED DI 4
POSITION
CODER
ANALOG
INTERFACE
SPINDLE

SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC
EMERGENCY STOP

APC BATTERY

5TH
SERVO AMP

6V

AC100V
AC200V

T1

5TH SERVO
MOTOR

CN1

SERIAL PULSE
CODER
SCALE

6TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

7TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

8TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

To CRT (in case of graphic display)

REMOTE BUFFER (RS232C)

REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS422/RS485)


PCR 20 connector (20 pins)
PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
AMP connector
Others

NOTE
Some connections in the above diagram may not be
provided, depending on the system configuration.

82

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

4.3
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES 15MB OR
SERIES 150MB
(IN CASE OF
MULTIPLE AXIS)

83

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

4.3.1
Control Unit

POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
+24E(CP6)
PMC BOARD

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T

MEM CARD(CNMC)

+24V WHEN 9 MONOCHROME CRT

MEMORY
CARD

FANUC I/O Link

I/O LINK(JD1A)

CP61
JD1A
JD1B

CN2
CN1
CNK1

OP PANEL
INTERFACE
UNIT

JD1A
JD1B
CP32

::

INPUT
UNIT
CPD2A

CRT/MDI
UNIT
ON/OFF

OPERATORS
PANEL

POWER
MAGNETICS

I/O Unit
MODELA

24VDC

MAIN CPU BOARD


CRT(JA1)
MDI(JA2)
R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)
MPG(JA3)
HDI1(JA5A)
MAX BUS(JNC)

RS232C I/O DEVICE

HIGH SPEED DI

SUB CPU BOARD


R2329(JD5J)

RS232C I/O DEVICE


RS422 I/O DEVICE

R4224(JD6D)

ANALOG INPUT
HIGH SPEED DI

AIN(JA6)
HDI2(JA5B)

OPTION1 BOARD

200 to
240VAC
POWER

CPD1
CPD2B

4
4

To CRT (in case of graphic display)

CRT(JA1)

RS2323(JD5C)

REMOTE BUFFER (RS232C)

RS4221(JD6A)

REMOTE BUFFER/DNC1 (RS422/RS485)

TO ADDITIONAL CABINET (BUFFER BOARD JNC)

PCR 20 connector (20 pins)


PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
AMP connector
Others

NOTE
Some connections in the above diagram may not be
provided, depending on the system configuration.

84

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

4.3.2
Additional Cabinet
(In Case of Serial
Spindle Interface)

POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)

CPD1
INPUT
CPD2C UNIT

BUFFER BOARD
MAX BUS(JNC)

1ST CPU BOARD

To control unit (Main CPU board JNC)

SPDL1(JA7A)

ASPDL1(JA8A)

A
D
D
I
T
I
O
N
A
L
C
A
B
I
N
E
T

APCBAT(JA4)

AMP1(JV1)

JA7B
JA7A

APC BATTERY

SERIES CN2
SERIAL
INTERFACE
SPINDLE

SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC

TO 2ND AMP

1ST SERVO AMP


6V

EMERGENCY STOP
AC100V
AC200V

T1

1ST SERVO
MOTOR

CN1

SERIAL PULSE
CODER

ENC1(JF1)

SCALE

SCALE1(JF21)
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)

POSITION
CODER

2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

4TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

ADDS1(JF61)

1ST AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR

ADDS2(JF62)

2ND AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR

ADDS3(JF63)

3RD AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR

ADDS4(JF64)

4TH AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR

2ND CPU BOARD

Reference position approach signal


PCR 20 connector (20 pins)

NZ/ZD(JA16)

More than one axis CPU board may be used, depending


on the system configuration.

85

PCR 20 connector (15 pins)


AMP connector
Others

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

NOTE
Some connections in the above diagram may not be
provided, depending on the system configuration.

4.3.3
Additional Cabinet
(In Case of Analog
Spindle Interface)

86

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)

CPD1 INPUT T
CPD2C UNIT

BUFFER BOARD
MAX BUS(JNC)

1ST CPU BOARD

To control unit (Main CPU board JNC)


POSITION
CODER
ANALOG
INTERFACE
SPINDLE

SPDL1(JA7A)

SPINDLE
MOTOR
200VAC

ASPDL1(JA8A)

A
D
D
I
T
I
O
N
A
L
C
A
B
I
N
E
T

APCBAT(JA4)

AMP1(JV1)

APC BATTERY

EMERGENCY STOP

1ST SERBO
AMP
T1

6V

AC100V
AC200V
1ST SERVO
MOTOR

CN1

SERIAL PULSE
CODER

ENC1(JF1)

SCALE

SCALE1(JF21)
AMP2(JV2)
ENC2(JF2)
SCALE2(JF22)
AMP3(JV3)
ENC3(JF3)
SCALE3(JF23)
AMP4(JV4)
ENC4(JF4)
SCALE4(JF24)

2ND AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

3RD AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

4TH AXIS SERVO AMP/MOTOR/PULSE CODER/SCALE

ADDS1(JF61)

1ST AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR

ADDS2(JF62)

2ND AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR

ADDS3(JF63)

3RD AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR

ADDS4(JF64)

4TH AXIS PULSE POSITION DETECTOR

Reference position approach signal

NZ/ZD(JA16)
2ND CPU BOARD

More than one axis CPU board may be used, depending


on the system configuration.

PCR 20 connector (20 pins)


PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
AMP connector
Others

NOTE
Some connections in the above diagram may not be
provided, depending on the system configuration.

87

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

4.3.4
Connection Between
the Control Unit and
Additional Locker

B62073E/04

Instead of the two flat cables employed by the F15A (used with multiaxis
machines), a 96core cable is used to connect the control unit to the
additional locker. The cable length, however, is the same as that of the
F15A (1.5 m).

1.5m 96core cable (supplied by FANUC)


Specification: A02B0162K821

88

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

4.4
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES 15B (IN
CASE OF MMCII)

POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)

200240VAC POWER
SUPPLY

Main CPU BOARD


MDI(JA2)

MMCII
GRAPHIC BOARD

C
O
N
T
R
O
L
U
N
I
T

ON/OFF
CN2
CRT/MDI
CN1
UNIT
CNK1

PW2
JD7A

HARD
DISK
UNIT

JD7B

CRT(JA1)

SCSI terminator

MMCII
MAIN CPU BOARD

CASSETTE
STREAMER UNIT
JD7B
JD7A

PW1

HDD(JD7)

FLOPPY DISK
JD8
PW1

FDD(JD8)

CENTRO(JD9)

RS422(JD6)

PRINTER

CENTRONICS

(Note 2)

RS422 I/O DEVICE


RS232C I/O DEVICE
RS232C I/O DEVICE
RS232C I/O DEVICE

R2321(JD5A)
R2322(JD5B)

EXTENSION
ADAPTER UNIT
CD14
JD5
CA38
JA1

KEY(JD5C)

89

KEYBOARD UNIT
PCR 20 connector (20 pins)
PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
AMP connector
Others

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMCII and peripheral devices. For
details of the other connections, see 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.
2 The MMCII CPU (A02B0120J202), which requires three RS232C channels, uses JD6 as
an RS232C port.
3 The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

90

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

4.5
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
SERIES 15B (IN
CASE OF MMCIII)

POWER SUPPLY
ACIN(CP1)
ACOUT(CP2)
ACOUT(CP3)
ON/OFF(CP4)
+24V(CP5)
MINI SLOT
EXTERNAL HARD
DISK INTERFACE
SCSI(JD19)

C
O
N
T
R
MAIN CPU BOARD
O
MDI(JA2)
L

AC200V240V POWER
SUPPLY
ON/OFF
CN2
CRT/MDI
CN1
UNIT
CNK1

(Note 2)

U OPTION 1 BOARD
N
I
CRT(JA1)
T
MMCIII

CPU

External hard disk


(POKEDY2.5)
(Note 2)

NC CRT(JA1B)
CART(JA1A)

R2321(JD5F)

RS232C CHANNEL1

R2322(JD5G)

RS232C CHANNEL2

R2323(JD5H)

RS232C CHANNEL3

PCR 20 connector (20 pins)


PCR 20 connector (15 pins)
AMP connector
Others (connection to external
hard disk3M MDR connector)

NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMCIII and peripheral devices. For
details of the other connections, see 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.
2 Used for application download only.
3 The MMCIII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

91

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

4.6
CONNECTION
DIAGRAM FOR
MMCIV

POWER SUPPLY
ACIN (CP1)

AC200V240V
POWER SUPPLY

ACOUT (CP2)
ACOUT (CP3)

ON/OFF (CP4)

ON/OFF
CN2
CRT/MDI

+24V (CP5)

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

CN1

UNIT

CNK1

MAIN CPU BOARD


MDI (JA2)
Option 1 BOARD

CRT (JA1)
U
N
I
T

MMCIV CPU
NC CRT (JA1B)

CRT (JA1A)
R2321 (JD5F)

RS232C I/O DEVICE

R2322 (JD5G)

FLOPPY DISK UNIT


*
JD8

FDD (JD8)

PW1

AC100V IN

CENTRO (JD9)

PRINTER

CUSTOM
KEYBOARD

EX KEY (JD21)

*
KEYBOARD (CD32A)

FULL KEYBOARD

MOUSE (CD32B)

92

*
MOUSE
: PCR20 connector (20 pins)
: AMP connector
: Others

POWER
SUPPLY

4. TOTAL CONNECTION

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connections between the MMCIV and peripheral devices. For
details of the other connections, see 4.1, 4.2, and 4.3.
2 Devices marked by an asterisk * are used only for application download only. These devices
cannot be used for incorporating units.
3 The MMCIV board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

93

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT UNIT CONNECTION

94

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

5.1
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT PANEL LAYOUT

CP1 (AC INPUT 200V to 240V)

F2 (AC INPUT FUSE)

F1 (AC INPUT FUSE)

CP3 (AC OUTPUT)

CP2 (AC OUTPUT)

Key location

PIL (PILOT LAMP)


CP8 (BATTERY)

ALM (ALARM LAMP)


CP4 (POWER
CONTROL)
6pin connector
CP6 (+24E OUTPUT)

CP5 (+24V OUTPUT)

F3 (+24V FUSE 3.2A)

F4 (+24E FUSE 5A)

Fig. 5.1 (a) For power unit A02B0162H101 or H102

CAUTION
Connector compatibility
CP1
CP2
CP3
CP4
CP5
CP6

COMPATIBLE
INCOMPATIBLE (key groove on the connector
prevents erroneous connection)

95

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

CP1 (AC INPUT 200V to 240V)

F1 (AC INPUT
FUSE)

CP2 (AC OUTPUT)

CP3 (AC OUTPUT)

200B

200B

200A

200A
Key
location

PIL (PILOT LAMP)

CP8 (BATTERY)
1

+VB

0V

ALM (ALARM LAMP)


CP4 (POWER CONTROL)
6pin connector

CP5 (+24V OUTPUT)


3
2

0V

+24V

B3

FB

A3

COM

B2

FA

A2

OFF

B1

AL

A1

ON

CP6 (+24E FUSE 5A)


3

F3 (+24V FUSE)
AI 3.2A
BI 5.0A

0V

+24E

F4 (+24E FUSE 5A)

Fig. 5.1 (b) For power unit A02B0162H107 or H108

CAUTION
Connector compatibility
CP1
CP2
COMPATIBLE
CP3
CP4
CP5
CP6

96

INCOMPATIBLE
(key groove on the
connector prevents
erroneous connection)

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

5.2
CONNECTING THE
POWER SUPPLY
UNIT
5.2.1
When an Input Unit is
not Used

The power supply unit of the Series 15B has the power on/off control
function. The power supply unit of the Series 15B therefore does not
need an input unit, which is necessary for the power supply unit of the
Series 15A, to control power on/off.
NOTE
When an input unit is not used, the capacity and the number
of connectors of the AC outputs for which power on/off is
controlled are shown in the figure below. When the capacity
or the number of connectors is insufficient, see section
5.2.3.

97

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

AMP (Japan)
21782883 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)

AMP (Japan)
117828833 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)

9 monochrome CRT (only 1 unit)


9 PDP
9.5 LCD
10.4 LCD

(1) CP1
The AC input connector for the control unit. The AC input
specifications are as follows:
R and S: 200 to 240 VAC +10%/15%, 1f , 50 Hz/60 Hz " 3 Hz
G: Grounding (class 3 or better)
NOTE
The above specifications may be limited depending on the
device powered from CP2 or CP3.
(2) CP2 and CP3
The connectors for AC outputs for which power on/off is synchronized
with the power on/off of the control unit.
The AC output specifications are the same as the AC input for CP1.
The AC input specifications for CP1 may be limited depending on the
AC input specifications for a device connected to CP2 or CP3.
98

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

Example) When a device of 200/220 VAC (which does not accept 240
V) is connected to CP2, the AC input specification for CP1
is also 200/220 VAC.
The total AC output from CP2 and CP3 is up to 2.5 A.
When the capacity is insufficient, see section 5.2.3.
(3) CP4
The connector for controlling the power. The poweron and
poweroff buttons are connected here.
(a) Power on/off (EON, EOF, and COM)
Turns on and off the power to the control unit.
(Time conditions)
TOFON

TON
Between
EON
and COM
Between
EOF and
COM

Shorted
Open

TON y 500msec
TOFF

Shorted
Open
(Power is on.) (Power is off.)

TOFF y 500msec
TOFON y 5sec
(power is on.)

(Contact specifications)
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between the contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or higher (The minimum load is 2
mA or lower.)
(b) Alarm input (AL and OFF)
Receives an alarm signal from outside the control unit to turn off
the power to the system. Input a contact signal which is closed
when an alarm occurs.
(Contact specifications)
Withstand voltage: 30 VDC or more (between the contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or more (The minimum load is 1
mA or less.)
(c) Alarm output (FA and FB)
Shorts FA and FB when an abnormality is found in the power
supply unit for the control unit, for example, when the fuse for
direct current output blows or when an excessive voltage or current
is detected at the direct current output. When an alarm input
(between AL and OFF) is closed, FA and FB are also shorted. This
signal is held until the poweroff button is pressed or the input
power (AC input of the power supply unit) is turned off. When this
signal is output, the power to the control unit is turned off and the
poweron button is disabled.
(Contact ratings) 50 VDC or less
0.5 A or less
50 VAC or less
5 VA or less
(4) CP5
+24 VDC power output
Connector for +24 VDC power displays (9 CRT/PDP, 9.5 LCD,
10.4 LCD)
99

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

(5) CP6
The connector for the +24 VDC power output for the machine
interface I/O (connection unit, operators panel connection unit, etc.).
The DC output supplied from CP6 is up to 3 A.

5.2.2
When an Input Unit is
Used

The power supply unit of the Series 15B has the power on/off control
function.
However, when an external input unit is used, the poweron and
poweroff buttons may not be connected to the power supply unit. In this
case, the following connection is recommended. The signals ON, OFF,
and COM are wired together. This means that the power supply unit
operates while its AC input power is supplied to CP1.
(1) For other than multiaxis machines

External input unit

CP1 (Input of 200 to 240 VAC)

CP4 (Power control)

AMP (Japan)
11781283

Poweron
and
poweroff
buttons

200 to 240 VAC


1f , 50 Hz/60 Hz

AMP (Japan)
21781296

NOTE
As shown in the above figure, when external input unit
A14B0076B001 is used, the number of AC output
connectors for which power on/off is controlled increases
but the capacity of the AC input fuse in the input unit and that
in the power supply unit is the same (10 A for power supply
B1). This input unit therefore cannot be used in order to
increase the capacity of the AC output for which power
on/off is controlled.

100

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

When the A14B0076B001 is used as an input unit, connect the input


unit to the power supply unit as shown below.
Fuses

X
X
X

U, V, W Servo
threephase input

Not
used

200 to 240 VAC


1f

Magnetic contactor

200/220 VAC with power


on/off controlled

MCC

0.3A

To servo
transformer

Y
Y

TP1

CP2
ON
OFF

EON

R, S, G

CP1

(6P, black)

Series 15B

EOF
COM
FA
CP21

FB
TP2

The input unit is within the dotted lines.


TP1 and TP2: M4 screw terminals

CP11

CP22

CP12

CP23

CP13

CP25

PA

CP26

PB

200 to 240 VAC with power


on/off controlled

NOTE
Refer to the Series 15A Connection Manual for details of
the input unit connectors.

101

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

(2) For multiaxis machines


When using multiaxis machines, be sure to use the input unit as two
power supply units are controlled.
When A14B0076B401 (15MB for multiaxis machines) is used as
the input unit, it is connected to the power unit as follows:
FA15MODEL B Multiple
axis input unit

FS15MODEL B Main
cabinet
Power supply unit
CPI (AC input)

CPDI (AC output)

CP4 (Power supply


control)

CPD2B (Power supply


control)

FS15MODEL B Additional
cabinet
CPD2C (Power supply
control)

Power supply unit


CPI (AC input)

CP4 (Power supply


control)

CPD2A (Power supply


control)

POWER
BUTTON
ON
POWER
BUTTON OFF

(Note)

ALARM INPUT
HOUSING

AMP (JAPAN)
CONTACT

ALARM OUTPUT

102

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

5.2.3
When AC Output
Terminals for Which
Power On/Off is
Controlled are
Insufficient

Through the CP2 and CP3 connectors, the power supply unit can output
a total AC current of up to 2.5 A subject to power on/off is control.
When the number of connectors or the capacity of the output from the
power unit is insufficient, the following connection is recommended:

Power supply unit


200 to 240 VAC, 1f

200B

200A

Ground

AMP (Japan)

M4 screw
terminals

11781283 (Housing)
11752185 (Contact)
CP91
3
G
FCI Japan

200B

SMS3PWS5 (Housing)

200A

Y
Y

CP3 (AC output)

10A

RC16MSCT3 (Contact)
Expanded power input unit

CP92 CP93 CP94 CP95 CP96

FCI Japan
SMS3PWS5 (Housing)
RC16MSCT3 (Contact)
Pin assignment layout for the
CP92 to CP96 connectors
3

200B

200A

Expanded input unit : A14B0076B209

103

200 to 240 VAC with power


on/off controlled

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

5.2.4

B62073E/04

Power ON the power supplies in the following order or simultaneously:

Power ON Sequence
1 Power supply (200 VAC) for entire machine tool
2 Power supply (I/O UnitMODEL A, etc.) for slave I/O
devices connected via I/O Link and power supply (24 VDC)
for servo amplifier
3 Power supply (200 VAC) for control unit

Leave the memory backup battery and separate absolute pulse coder
battery connected regardless of the ON/OFF state of the control unit
power supply. If these batteries are removed with the control unit turned
OFF, parameters, part programs, pulse coder position data and other data
stored on the control unit will be lost.
For details, see 3.7.3 Replacing the battery.

5.2.5

Power OFF the power supplies in the following order:

Power OFF Sequence


1 Power supply (200 VAC) for control unit
2 Power supply (I/O UnitMODEL A, etc.) for slave I/O
devices connected via I/O Link and power supply (24 VDC)
for servo amplifier
3 Power supply (200 VAC) for entire machine tool

The motor cannot be controlled when the power is turned OFF or if a


power interruption occurs. Adopt the required corrective action on the
machine tool for trouble that arises from the inability to control the motor.
For example, insert a brake to prevent the shaft from falling when the shaft
operating in the gravity shaft direction is being controlled. The brake
clamps the motor when the servo has not started up or when the motor is
not operating, and unclamps the motor only while it is operating. In other
words, the servo motor is normally clamped when a power OFF or power
interruption prevents servo axis control. The axis being controlled may
fall in the time up to activation of the motor clamp relay. So, you must
evaluate whether or not the amount that the axis falls is a problem.
NOTE
When the MMCIV and intelligent terminal are used, shut
down the OS before you turn the control unit OFF. If the
power is turned OFF during accessing of the hard disk or
while the operating system is still running, data on the hard
disk is more likely to be damaged. Avoid this at all costs.

104

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

5.3
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT FOR
STANDALONE
CABINET A
5.3.1
Input Unit Layout

Input PCB

Input fuse for servo amp.

Input fuse for control unit


Input Unit
(A14B0076B004, B005, B008)

5.3.2
Connection to
Input Units
(A14B0076B004,
B005, and B008)

(1) Terminal Unit TP1


GND

AC200/220V 3f 60Hz
or AC200V 3f 50Hz

M5 screw Terminal 4

These terminals are for AC power input. The cabinet must be


equipped with a breaker or fuse to protect the wiring against
overcurrents. Provide a ground of class 3 or higher.
105

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

(2) Terminal Unit TP2


EON

EOF

COM

FA

FB

M5 screw Terminal 5

(a) EON, EOF, COM : External power supply ON/OFF Terminal


The external power ON/OFF terminal is used to turn on and off the
power supplied from outside the control unit. The connection is as
follows:

EON

POWER
ON

Input unit
EOF

POWER
OFF
COM
Remove this connection.

External power supply ON/OFF Signal

The following figure shows the timing chart according to which the
external power is turned on and off.
Tofon
EONCOM

EOFCOM

Ton

Toff

(Power ON)

(Power OFF)
Ton y 500msec
Toff y 500msec
Tofon y 5sec

The time chart of external power supply ON/OFF signal

The contacts used for turning on and off the external power must
conform to the following specifications:
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or higher (with minimum load of
2 mA or lower)
106

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

(b) FA and FB: Fuse alarm signal


A short circuit occurs between FA and FB if the fuse used in the
power unit of the NC blows or if an overvoltage or overcurrent is
detected at the DC output of the power unit. FA and FB are also
shortcircuited if an alarm signal is input from CP6. The fuse
alarm signal is maintained until the power being supplied to the NC
is turned off or the OFF button is pressed.
When this signal is output, the NC power is turned off and the
POWER ON and EXTERNAL POWER ON buttons are disabled.
The connection is as follows:

Input Unit

Contact voltage rating


DC 50V or lower
DC 0.5V or lower
AC 50V or lower
AC 5VA or lower

FA
FB

Fuse alarm signal

(3) Terminal Unit TP4


R

EMG
IN1

EMG
IN2

EMG
OUT1

EMG
OUT2

EXR

EXS

M4 screw Terminal 8

(a) R and S
These terminals are used for singlephase 200VAC input to the
control unit. The connection is normally as follows:

F1

TP4

F2

TP1

Remove this connection when using separate sources for the


threephase AC input (for the servo amplifier) and the
singlephase 200 VAC input (for the control unit).

107

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

(b) EMGIN1, 2 Note 1)


Connect to the 100VAC (MCC) terminals of the servo amplifier,
as shown below:

Standalone cabinet
AC100 V

Emergency stop

EMGIN1
To MCC terminals of
the servo amplifier in
the standalone cabinet

EMGIN2

Prepare an external 100VAC power


source, and connect in series with the
emergency stop contactor.

(c) EMGOUT1, 2
Not used.
(d) EXR and EXS (Note)
These terminals are for ON/OFFcontrolled, singlephase
200/220 VAC output. Connect this output to an electromagnetic
contactor such that the servo amplifier power source, installed
outside the cabinet, can be turned on and off together with the NC
power. The current must not exceed 0.3 mA.
NOTE
These terminals are used to connect the additional cabinet
when use of the timing control cable (A02B0163J101) is
specified. In this case, two cables may be connected to one
terminal.
(4) Connector CP4
When the cabinet is equipped with a builtin tape reader, this terminal
is connected to the tape reader at the factory. When the tape reader is
installed outside the cabinet, this terminal is used for power input.

108

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

5.3.3
Connection to the
Control Unit

The following units can be mounted in the standalone cabinet. Necessary


control unit PCB connections are completed at the factory.
Unit

PCB

Connector

Function

Remark

9 monochrome
CRT unit

PSU
MAIN
MAIN

CP5
JA1
JA2

DC24V
CRT
MDI

Note 1)

Connection unit

PSU
PMC

CP6
JD1A

DC24E
IOLINK

Note 2)

Tape reader

MAIN

JD5B

RS2322

Punch panel

MAIN

JD5A

RS2321

APC battery
(1 pc only)

MAIN

JA4A

APCBAT

Servo amp.

MAIN
SUB

JV1 to 4
JV5 to 8

AMP1 to 4
AMP5 to 8

Note 3)

PSU : Power supply unit


MAIN : Main CPU board
PMC: PMC board
SUB : Sub board

NOTE
1 Can be used for power input when the 9 monochrome CRT
unit is installed outside the cabinet.
2 Can be used for power input when the connection unit is
installed outside the cabinet.
3 The connections to be made will change, depending on the
ordered specifications.

109

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

5.4
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT FOR
STANDALONE
CABINET B
5.4.1
Input Unit Layout

Input Unit (A14B0076B411)

110

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

5.4.2
Connection to Input
Unit (A14B0076B411)

(1) Terminal Unit TB2 (M4 terminal)


(a) R, S
These terminals are for singlephase 200/220 VAC input to devices
to which power is supplied from the control unit (main and
additional lockers) and the input unit.
(b) 200A, 200B Note)
These terminals are for ON/OFFcontrolled, singlephase
200/220 VAC output.
Connect these terminals to an
electromagnetic contactor such that the servo amplifier power
source, installed outside the cabinet, can be turned on and off
together with the NC power.
NOTE
These terminals are used to connect the additional cabinet
when use of the timing control cable (A02B0163J101) is
specified.

(c) INT1. INT2 Note)


These are the door interlock terminals, used for cabinets other than
standalone cabinet B. When the two terminals are open, the NC
power is off.
NOTE
These terminals are used to connect the additional cabinet
when use of the timing control cable (A02B0163J101) is
specified.

(d) EON, EOF, COM1 : External power ON/OFF terminal


The external power ON/OFF terminal is used to turn on and off the
power supplied from outside the control unit. The connection is as
follows:

EON

POWER
ON

Input unit
EOF

POWER
OFF
COM
Remove this connection.

External power supply ON/OFF Signal

The following figure shows the timing chart according to which the
external power is turned on and off.
111

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

Tofon
EONCOM

EOFCOM
Ton

Toff

(Power ON)

(Power OFF)

Ton y 500msec
Toff y 500msec
Tofon y 5msec
The time chart of external power supply ON/OFF signal

The contacts used for turning on and off the external power must
conform to the following specifications:
Withstand voltage: 50 VDC or higher (between contacts)
Withstand current: 100 mA or higher
(with minimum load of 2 mA or lower)
(e) EMGPIT1. 2
Not used.
(f) 200R1, 200S1, and COM2
These terminals are for input unit internal connections.
(2) Terminal unit TB3 (Faston terminal)
This is the door interlock terminal used for standalone cabinet B. The
terminal is used when use of the door interlock (A02B0116J001) is
specified.
(3) PCB1 (A17B16000580)
(a) Connector CPD1 (AMP housing: 11781283, contact:
11752185)
This terminal is used to supply singlephase 200/220 VAC to the
main and additional lockers. These connections are made at the
factory.
(b) Connecter CPD2A
(A1 to A3: AMP Housing 21781283, Contact 11752182)
(B1 to B3: AMP Housing 21781283, Contact 11752182)

A1

ON

B1

AL

A2

OFF

B2

FA

A3

COM

B3

FB

ON, OFF, COM (A1 to A3)


These terminals are connected at the factory.
112

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

FA, FB: Fuse alarm output signal (B1 to B3)


A short circuit occurs between FA and FB if the fuse used in the
power unit of the NC blows or if an overvoltage or overcurrent is
detected at the DC output of the power unit. FA and FB are also
shortcircuited if an alarm signal is input from AL. The fuse alarm
signal is maintained until the power being supplied to the NC is
turned off or the OFF button is pressed.
When this signal is output, the NC power is turned off and the
POWER ON and EXTERNAL POWER ON buttons are
invalidated. The connection is as follows:

Input Unit
FA
FB

Contact voltage rating


DC 50V or lower
DC 0.5V or lower
AC 50A or lower
AC 5VAor lower

Fuse alarm signal

(c) Connector CPD2B


(AMP Housing 21781296, Contact
11752182)
This terminal is used for the control signals that turn on and off the
main locker power. The connection to the main cabinet is
completed at the factory.
(d) Connector CPD2C
(AMP Housing 21781296, Contact
11752182)
This terminal is for the control signals that turn on and off the
additional locker power. The connection to the additional cabinet
is completed at the factory.
(4) PCB2 (A20B10010210)
CP91 to CP96 (connector: FCI Japan, housing: SMS3PK5, contact:
RC16M23T3 or RC16MSCT3)
(a) Connector CP91
This terminal is for ON/OFFcontrolled, singlephase 200/220
VAC input. This connection is completed at the factory.
(b) Connector CP92
This terminal is connected to the 200A and 200B terminals of
terminal unit TB2.
(c) Connector CP93
This terminal is for power supply (120 W) to the cooling fan of the
standalone cabinet.
(d) Connector CP94
When the cabinet is equipped with a builtin tape reader, this
terminal is connected to the tape reader at the factory. When the
tape reader is installed outside the cabinet, this terminal is used for
power input.
Power requirement of builtin tape reader: 110 VA (without reel)
130 VA (with reel)
113

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

(e) Connector CP95, CP96


These terminals are for ON/OFFcontrolled, singlephase
200/220 VAC output. They are used for power supply to external
units. The rating of each terminal must be set such that the total of
the ratings of CP92 to PC96 does not exceed 1.4 kVA.

5.4.3

The following units can be mounted in standalone cabinet B and


additional lockers. All necessary PCB connections in the control unit (of
the main and additional lockers) are completed at the factory.

Connection to Control
Unit
Unit

Lockers

PCB

Connector

Function

Remark

9 monochrome CRT unit

MAIN
MAIN
MAIN

PSU
MAIN
MAIN

CP5
JA1
JA2

DC24V
CRT
MDI

Note 1)

Connection unit

MAIN
MAIN

PSU
PMC

CP6
JD1A

DC24E
IOLINK

Note 2)

Tape reader

MAIN

MAIN

JD5B

RS2322

Punch panel

MAIN

MAIN

JD5A

RS2321

APC battery (1 pc only)

ADD

MAIN

JA4A

APCBAT

Servo amp.

ADD

AXIS

JV1 to 4

AMP1 to 4

MAIN

: Main Cabinet

ADD

: Additional Cabinet

PSU

: Power supply unit

MAIN

: Main CPU board

PMC

: PMC board

AXIS

: Axis CPU board

Note 3)

NOTE
1 Can be used for power input when the 9 monochrome CRT
unit is installed outside the cabinet.
2 Can be used for power input when the connection unit is
installed outside the cabinet.
3 The connections to be made will change, depending on the
ordered specifications.

114

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

5.5
CONNECTION OF
INPUT UNIT FOR
ADDITIONAL
CABINET A
5.5.1
Input Unit Layout

LC2

GND
U V

Electromagnetic
Contactor

SK2

Spark
Killer

F17

F18 F19
Fuse for servo amp.

Terminal unit

GND

T1

TA

NOTE
Terminal unit T1 is not installed when using the
A02B0075J141 or J144 input terminal.

115

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

Input unit order drawing numbers and unit drawing numbers

5.5.2

unit order drawing number

unit drawing number

A02B0075J141, J144

A02B0075C006

A02B0075J142, J145

A02B0075C007

(1) Connection of threephase power for the servo amplifier

Cable Connection
[Connection to the
Input Unit
(A02B0075J141,
J142, J144, and
J145)]

Connect the threephase power for


the servo amplifier to these terminals
(M6 screw terminals).
U

GND

AC200/220V 3f 60Hz
or AC200V 3f 50Hz
Note) Provide a ground of
class 3 or higher.

Electromagnetic
Contactor
LC2

Fuse
F17 to F19

Connected to the line filters or servo


terminal units.

(2) Terminal unit T1 (M4 screw terminal)


Not used.
(3) Terminal unit TA (M4 screw terminal)

10

11

12

IN

OUT
100V

IN

OUT

DOOR INT. LOCK

200V

The terminals of the upper row are used for connecting wires inside the
cabinet, and those of the lower row are used for connecting external
devices.
NOTE
In the following text, the terms previous cabinet and next
cabinet refer to the cabinets shown below:

116

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

Previous cabinet
(the cabinet
connected before
that being
considered)

Additional
cabinet

Previous cabinet
(the cabinet
connected before
that being
considered)

Additional
cabinet

Next cabinet (the


cabinet connected
after that being
considered)

Previous cabinet
(the cabinet
connected before
that being
considered)

Main cabinet

Next cabinet (the


cabinet connected
after that being
considered)

Previous cabinet
(the cabinet
connected before
that being
considered)

Additional
cabinet

Next cabinet (the


cabinet connected
after that being
considered)

Additional
cabinet

Next cabinet (the


cabinet connected
after that being
considered)

(a) Terminal 1 to 4
These terminals are for 100 VAC (MCC) connection for the servo
amplifier.
The connections are as follows:
To each servo amplifier in the cabinet

These terminals receive


100 VAC from the previous
cabinet, etc. Depending on
the previous cabinet, the
connection differs as
follows:

These terminals
supply 100 VAC to the
next cabinet.
These connections are
made at the factory.

a. When the previous cabinet is an additional cabinet:


These connections are made at the factory.
b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the
timing control cable (A02B0163J101) is specified:
These connections are made at the factory.
c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B:
Prepare an external 100VAC power source and connect it in
series with the emergency stop contactor, as shown below.

117

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

EMERGENCY stop
Contactor

AC100 V

(b) Terminal 5 to 8
These terminals are for ON/OFFcontrolled singlephase 200 JAC
input, used for controlling the electromagnetic contactors for the
cabinet fan and servo amplifier power. Connections are as follows:
N

LC2

1c2

These terminals receive 200


VAC from the previous
cabinet, etc. Depending on
the previous cabinet, the
connection differs as
follows:

These terminals supply


200 VAC to the next
cabinet. These
connections are made
at the factory.

a. When the previous cabinet is an additional cabinet:


These connections are made at the factory.
b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the
timing control cable (A02B0163J101) is specified:
These connections are made at the factory.
c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B and the
timing control cable (A02B0164J101) is specified:
These connections are made at the factory.

118

5. POWER SUPPLY UNIT AND INPUT


UNIT CONNECTION

B62073E/04

(c) Terminal 9 to 12
These terminals are for the door interlock. The connections are as
follows:

When the door interlock


(A02B0075J052) is specified,
these connections are made at
the factory.

These terminals supply the door interlock signal


to the next cabinet. When there is no next
cabinet, terminals 3 and 4 are shortcircuited.
These connections are completed at the factory.

These terminals receive the door


interlock signal from the previous
cabinet. Depending on the previous
cabinet, the connection differs.

a. When the previous cabinet is an additional cabinet:


These connections are made at the factory.
b. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet A and the door
interlock (A02B0076J204) is specified:
Connections are completed at the factory.
c. When the previous cabinet is standalone cabinet B and the
timing control cable (A02B0164J101) is specified:
These connections are made at the factory.

119

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO MACHINE INTERFACE

120

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.1
OUTLINE

The Series 15B can be combined with the units shown in the table below
as I/O units for the machine interface.
The I/O units for the FANUC I/O Link are installed separately from the
control unit, and connected with the control unit using the dedicated serial
FANUC I/O Link.
As shown in the figure below, two or more units can be installed
separately. By placing the connection unit for the operators panel near
the operators panel, an operators panel that inputs/outputs many signals
can be interfaced easily.
The FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A is a modulartype I/O unit. It selects
necessary modules from various I/O modules provided by FANUC
according to the application and uses them as one external unit. The
FANUC I/O Link transfers data between the control unit and such an
external unit at a high speed. The states of the input signals from the
machine are transferred to the control unit at regular intervals. The states
of the output signals from the control unit are transferred to external units
at regular intervals. (Note that this manual covers only part of the uses
that the FANUC I/O Link has. For example, although it can be used for
connecting the 1axis CNC FANUC Power Mate or cell controller
FANUC FD Mate, this manual does not mention it. This is because the
purpose of this manual is to describe the I/O units having machine
interface.)
Table 6.1 Machine interface I/O
Type

Name

DI/DO points

FANUC I/O Link FANUC I/O Unit MODEL A


Max. 256/256 per group
compatible I/O
FANUC I/O Unit MODEL B (Note)
Max 1024/1024 in total
Max.
Operators Panel Connection Unit
Connection Unit

NOTE
Refer to FANUC I/O Unit MODEL B Connecting Manual
(B62123E).

121

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

FANUC Link Compatible I/O

Series 15B
Control Unit

FANUC
I/O Link

FANUC
I/O Link
I/O Unit
MODEL A

I/O Unit
MODEL A

Operators
panel connection
unit

Machine Tool

Fig. 6.1 FANUC I/O Link compatible I/O

122

Machine
Operators
Panel

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.2
CONNECTION OF
THE FANUC I/O LINK

In the I/O Link there are the master station and its slave stations. The
master is the control unit of the CNC, and the slaves are the I/O unit and
interface unit for the operators panel. The slaves are divided into groups,
and up to 16 groups can be connected to one I/O Link. A maximum of
two base I/O unitMODEL A can be connected as a group. The operators
panel connection unit and connection unit are each counted as one group.
The I/O Link is connected in different ways depending on the types of
units actually used and the I/O points. To connect the I/O Link, the
assignment and addresses of the I/O signals have been made
programmable with the PMC program. The maximum number of I/O
points is 1024.
The two connectors of the I/O link are named JD1A and JD1B, and are
common to all units. A cable is always connected from JD1A of a unit
to JD1B of the next unit. Although JD1B of the last unit is not used and
left open, it need not be connected with a terminator.
(A terminator is needed for the last interface module of each group of the
I/O UnitMODEL A.)
The pin assignments of connectors JD1A and JD1B are common to all
units on the I/O Link, and are illustrated on the next page. Use the figures
when connecting the I/O Link irrespective of the type of unit.

123

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

CNC

B62073E/04

JD1A

I/O = 256/256 or less per group


FANUC I/O Link

I/O = 1024/1024 or less in total

FANUC I/O Unit MODEL A 2 max

Base unit 1

Base unit 2

JD1B

Magnetic
circuit

JD1A

JD1B
JD1A

JD1B
JD1A

JD1B

Connection
JD1A unit 1

Up to 16
groups

Connection
unit 2

JD1B Operators panel


JD1A connection unit

Fig. 6.2 I/O Link connection diagram

124

Machine
operators
panel

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.2.1

Control unit or preceding slave unit

Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Electric
Cable

Next slave
unit

+5 V terminals are for an optical I/O link adapter. They are not necessary
when connecting with a metal cable.
CABLE WIRING

11

11

12

12

13

13

14

14

SIN

SOUT

*SIN

SOUT

*SOUT

SIN

*SOUT

0V

*SIN

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V
SHIELD
GROUND PLATE

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010284#10P
(#28AWG10pair)

125

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

6.2.2
Connection of FANUC
I/O Link by Optical
Fiber Cable

B62073E/04

The FANUC I/O Link can be extended to the maximum length of 200 m
(when a relay is not used) with optical fiber cables using an optical I/O
link adapter.
NOTE
In the following cases, use an optical fiber cable.

D
D

When the cable is more than 15 meters long.


When the cable runs between different cabinets and it is impossible to
connect the cabinets with a grounding wire of 5.5 mm2 or thicker.
D When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong noise; for
example :
When there is a strong electromagnetic noise source beside the cable
such as a welding machine.
When a noise generating cable such as a power cable runs for a long
distance in parallel with the cable.
(1) External dimension of optical link adapter
The standard type (A13B0154B001) and highspeed type
(A13B0154B002) are the same.
66.0
40.0

FANUC

Optical connector
COP1

18.0

Connector
for unit
connecting
JD1

7.0

45.0

4M3

(2) Weight of optical link adapter


Main body: Approx. 100 g
The standard type (A13B0154B001) and highspeed type
(A13B0154B002) are the same.

126

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(3) Connection
(a) Connection diagram

JD1

Unit
JD1A

JD1

Connecting
cable between
units

COP1

Unit

COP1

Optical
cable

Optical I/O
link adapter

Optical I/O
link adapter

JD1B

Connecting
cable between
units

(b) Interunit connecting cables


Unit side
JD1A, JD1B

Adapter side
JD1

(1) Recommended connector for cable side: PCRE20FS (made by HONDA


Communication Co., Ltd.)
(2) Recommended cable (wire material):

A66L00010284#10P

(3) Cable length:

Max. 2 m (when the recommended cable is used)

(c) Optical cable


(i) Specification: A66L 6001 0009#L5R003
A66L 6001 0009#L10R03
A66L 6001 0009#L15R03
(ii)Cable length: Max. 200 m (standard type)
Max. 100 m (highspeed type)

127

length 5 m
length 10 m
length 15 m

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

NOTE
The minimum bending radius of the optical fiber cable is 25
mm. Take care not to excessively twist the optical fiber
cable.
(4) Maximum number of stages
When a conventional optical I/O link adapter (standard type) is used
on the I/O link, up to five stages can be connected. Up to 16 stages can
be connected when the highspeed type is used.
1) Standard type (A13B0154B001) Maximum number of stage: 5
2) Highspeed type (A13B0154B002) Maximum number of
stages: 16

NC or
I/O Unit

Optical I/O
link adapter

Optical I/O
link adapter

NC or
I/O Unit

Optical I/O
link adapter

Optical I/O
link adapter

NC or
I/O Unit

1 stage

NOTE
Highspeed type adapters cannot be mixed with standard
type adapters on the same line.
(5) Power source
The standard type (A13B0154B001) and highspeed type
(A13B0154B002) are the same.
(a) Power voltage:
4.75 V to 5.25 V (at the receiving end)
(b) Consumption current:
200 mA
(6) Installation conditions
(a) The optical link adapter enclosure is not fully sealed ; install it with
the CNC control unit in the fully enclosed cabinet.
(b) Ground the case using the case fixing screw of the optical link
adapter.
(c) The optical link adapter is light, and it may not be necessary to
mount it with screws. However, keep it from coming in contact
with other circuits to prevent possible shortcircuits. When
mounting the optical link adapter in a cabinet, attach it with an
Ltype fitting using the case fixing screws (M3) of the optical link
adapter.

L fifting

128

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(7) Required parts


(a) For making up an I/O link using the optical link adapter, the
following parts are necessary:
(i) Optical I/O link adapter
2
(ii)Interunit connecting cable 2
(iii)Optical cable
1
(8) Relay using the optical fiber connection adapter
(a) External dimensions of optical fiber connection adapter

(b) Example of how to use the optical fiber connection adapter


Optical fiber connection
adapter

Optical fiber cable

Optical fiber cable

Mounting plate

NOTE
Only one relay connection can be made.
The optical fiber connection adapter cannot be used when
highspeed type optical link adapters are used.

129

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(c) Maximum transfer distance over the optical fiber cable


The following table shows the maximum transfer distance over the
optical fiber cable. This distances varies according to the number
of relay connections made using the connection adapter.

Standard type

Highspeed type

130

Number of Relays

Maximum Transfer Distance

200 m

100 m (total)

100 m

Not allowed

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.3

The FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A (I/O unit) is a modulartype I/O unit.


It interfaces the Series 16/18 with the machine when connected to the
control unit of the Series 15B control unit via the I/O Link. One I/O unit
can be configured by mounting the I/O modules required for either the 5
or 10slot base unit. A variety of I/O modules are provided so appropriate
modules can be selected according to the use, points, voltage level,
current capacity, and signal specifications. See Section 6.3.9 for further
information.

CONNECTION OF
THE FANUC I/O
UNITMODEL A

6.3.1
Structure of FANUC I/O
UnitMODEL A
Base Unit ABU05A (5 slots) or ABU10A (10 slots)
I/F

Various I/O modules (Up to 10 modules)

Interface module AIF01A or AIF01B

AIF01A is used for connection to FANUC I/O Link


AIF01B expands I/O units in the same group.

131

10

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.3.2
Outer Dimensions

f 5 (mounting hole)

6.3.3
Mounting and
Dismounting Modules

For 5slot base unit (ABU05A)

253

238

For 10slot base unit (ABU10A)

430

415

Interface modules and various types of I/O modules can be mounted to


and dismounted from the base unit easily as shown below.
(1) Mounting
(a) Hang the hook at the top of the module on the groove in the upper
side of the base unit.
(b) Make the connector of the module engage with that of the base unit.
(c) Push the module in the lower groove of the base unit till the stopper
in the lower side of the module stops.

132

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(2) Dismounting
(a) Release the stopper by pushing the lever at the bottom of the
module.
(b) Push the module upwards.

133

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.3.4
Connection Diagram
Series 15B
Control unit
JD1A
Terminator TX
K1X

I/O UnitA

I/O UnitA

AIF01A

AIF01B

JD1B
JD1A

JD3

JD2

JD2

CP32

CP32
DC24 V

DC24 V
K2X
K1X
AIF01A
Max. 16

AIF01B

JD1B

groups
JD1A

JD3

JD2

JD2

CP32

CP32

DC24 V

DC24 V
K2X

AIF01A

AIF01B

K1X
JD1B
JD1A

JD3

JD2

JD2

CP32

CP32

DC24 V

DC24 V
K2X

134

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 Number of I/O Units and connecting method are restricted
depending on the allocation of the I/O points.
See 6.2 Connection of FANUC I/O Link and 6.3.11
Number of I/O points for the I/O UnitMODEL A.
2 Cable K1X can be an optical fiber cable by using the optical
I/O link adapter.
3 Terminate connector JD2 of the last interface module
(AIF01B) of the group by using a terminator. See 6.3.7, (3).

6.3.5
Connecting Input
Power Source

Connect the following power source to the connector CP32 of the


interface module (AIF01A or AIF01B).

D
D

Voltage : DC24 V " 10%


Current : Determine from Table 6.3.6.
FCI Japan tripolar
connector (Brown)

AIF01A / AIF01B
CP32
1

+24 V

GND

Housing:

SMS3PNS5

Contact:

RC16MSCT3
DC24 V

NOTE
Turn ON the power for the I/O unit just before or when the
power for the CNC is turned ON. When the CNC power is
turned OFF, make sure to turn the power to the I/O unit OFF
as well.

ON
Power for the master
device

OFF
t

ON
Power for the I/O unit
OFF
t : more than 500 ms (Turn ON of the power for I/O unit can be late 500 ms or less.)

135

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.6

B62073E/04

(1) Ground the base unit (ABU05A, ABU10A) by its grounding terminal

Grounding

ABU05A, ABU10A

ABU05B, ABU10B

M4 screw terminal
for grounding

SG terminal
(M3 screw terminal)
M4 mounting hole
for grounding

136

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(2) When the cable K1X (see connection diagram in section 6.3.4) runs
between different cabinets, make sure to connect the cabinets with a
grounding wire more than 5.5 mm2.
Table 6.3.6 Required current of each module
Required current (mA) of +24 V
Mod le name
Module
A

AIF01A

50

AIF01B

50

AID32A

20+0.5n

30+7.5n

AID32B

20+0.5n

30+7.5n

AID16C

AID16D

AID32E

AID32F

AIA16G

5+1.5n

AOD08C

5+2n

AOD08D

5+2n

AOD16C

5+2n

AOD16D

5+2n

AOD32C

5+0.5n

AOD32D

5+0.5n

AOA05E

5+5.5n

AOA08E

5+5.5n

AOA12F

5+4.5n

AOR08G

10n

AOR16G

10n

AAD04A

130

n: Number of the input and output points (for each module) which
turn ON simultaneously

D
D

The current sum requirement for modules used in Column A should


not exceed 500 mA.
The current sum requirement for modules used in Column B should
not exceed 1500 mA.

137

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

6.3.7
Connecting Signal
Cables

B62073E/04

Details of the cables K1X, K2X and the terminator shown in the general
connection diagram are as follows.
(1) Cable K1X

AIF01A

CNC or AIF01A

Connector HONDA TSUSIN


PCRE20FS

(a) Use twisted pair wires for signal SIN and *SIN, and signals SOUT
and *SOUT.
(b) Recommended cable material:
A66L00010284#10P (twisted pair/shielded)
(c) Shielding wires should be connected with the grounding plate of
the cabinet at the JD1A side using a cable clamp.
(d) Maximum cable length: 10 m
(e) Do not make any wire connections to the connector spare pins.
(f) Use an optical I/O link adapter and an optical fiber cable, [in the
following cases]:
138

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(i) When the cable is more than 10 meters long.


(ii)When the cable runs between different cabinets and there is no
appropriate ground wire between the cabinets.
(iii)When there is concern that the cable is influenced by strong
noise.
(2) Cable K2X

AIF01B

AIF01A

Connector HONDA TSUSIN


PCRE20FS

(a) Connect the signals with the same name.


(b) Make sure to use twisted pair wires for the following signals:
S1 and *S1, S2 and *S2, S3 and *S3
S4 and *S4, S5 and *S5, S6 and *S6
139

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(c) Do not connect the pins No. 10, No. 19 and No. 20, as they are used
internally.
(d) Recommended cable material:
A66L00010284#10P (twisted pair/shielded)
(e) Maximum cable length: 2 m
(3) Terminator TX

Connector HONDA TSUSIN


PCRE20FS

(a) Terminate the connector JD2 of the last AIF01B in a


single group with the terminator.
(b) Shortcircuit the TRM1 signals as shown. Repeat the
shorting procedure for signals TRM2 and TRM3.

140

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.3.8
Connecting with I/O
Modules

For an external connecting method, there are two types of I/O modules :
one with a terminal block, and one with a connector.

Terminal block type

Connector type

Input/Output
display LED

A 0 . . . 7
B 0 . . . 7

Terminal
block cover
Connector
HONDA TSUSIN
MR50RMA

M3.5 screw terminal (20 terminals)

(1) The terminal block is a removable type.


(a) Dismounting the terminal block
(i) Open the cover of the terminal block.
(ii)Push up the latch at the top of the terminal block.
(iii)Drag out the tab at the top of the terminal block and pull it out.
The terminal block will be removed from the module.

141

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(b) Mounting the terminal block


(i) Insert the protruding portion at the bottom of the terminal block
in the groove of the module side.
(ii)Push the terminal block using the engaging point of the
protruding portion and the groove as an axis and mount it in the
module firmly.
(iii)Open the cover of the terminal block and check to make sure the
latch at the top of the terminal block is firmly set.

(2) Cautionary points when wiring terminal block type


(a) Wiring material: AWG22 to 18 (0.3 to 0.75mm2)
A wire as thin as possible is recommended.
(b) Crimp style terminal: M3.5
Crimp style terminal with no insulation
sleeve and a short distance A, as
illustrated in the drawing below, is
recommended.
A

(c) Mark tube: As short a mark tube as possible ; cover crimped part
with the mark tube.

142

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.3.9

(1) Digital input modules

Digital Input/Output
Module
Input type

Non
insulation
DC input

Insulation
type DC
input

AC input

Module
name

Rated
voltage

Rated
current

Polarity

Response
time

Points

External
connection

LED
display

AID32A

24 VDC

7.5 mA

Both

Maximum
20 ms

32

Connector

not
provided

AID32B

24 VDC

7.5 mA

Both

Maximum
2 ms

32

Connector

not
provided

AID16C

24 VDC

7.5 mA

NEG

Maximum
20 ms

16

Terminal
block

provided

AID16D

24 VDC

7.5 mA

POS

Maximum
20 ms

16

Terminal
block

provided

AID32E

24 VDC

7.5 mA

Both

Maximum
20 ms

32

Connector

not
provided

AID32F

24 VDC

7.5 mA

Both

Maximum
2 ms

32

Connector

not
provided

AIA16G

100 to
120 VAC

10.5 mA
(120 VAC)

16

Terminal
block

provided

ON Max 35 ms
OFF Max 45 ms

NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative: 0 V common (current source type)
The input is defined as ON when at a low level
Positive: 24 V common (current sink type)
The input is defined as ON when at a high level
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A
Connection/Maintenance Manual (B61813E).

143

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(2) Digital output modules


Output
type

Insulation
type DC
output

AC
output

Module
name

Rated
voltage

Rated
current

Polarity

Points

Points/
common

External
connection

LED
display

Fuse

AOD08C

2A

NEG

Terminal
block

provided

provided

AOD08D

2A

POS

Terminal
block

provided

provided

AOD16C

0.5A

NEG

16

Terminal
block

provided

not
provided

AOD16D

0.5A

POS

16

Terminal
block

provided

not
provided

AOD32C

0.3A

NEG

32

Connector

not
provided

not
provided

AOD32D

0.3A

POS

32

Connector

not
provided

not
provided

AOA05E

2A

Terminal
block

provided

provided

1A

Terminal
block

provided

provided

0.5A

12

Terminal
block

provided

provided

4A

Terminal
block

provided

not
provided

2A

16

Terminal
block

provided

not
provided

12 to 24
VDC

100 to 240
VAC
AOA08E
AOA12F
AOR08G

Relay
output
AOR16G

100 to 120
VAC
Maximum
250 VAC/
30 VDC

NOTE
1 Polarity
Negative: 0 V common (current sink type)
Output is at low level when ON.
Positive: 24 V common (current source type)
Output is at high level when ON.
2 For the details of the specifications for each module, refer to FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A
Connection/Maintenance Manual (B61813E).

144

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.3.10
Correspondence
between I/O Signals
and Addresses in a
Module

Bit
Address in
the module
7
0

A7

6
A6

5
A5

4
A4

3
A3

2
A2

1
A1

0
A0

Module of
8 points
Module of
16 points

B7

B6

B5

B4

B3

B2

B1

B0

C7

C6

C5

C4

C3

C2

C1

C0

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

D0

Module of
32 points

Addresses in a module are defined relatively, with the beginning address


as 0. Real addresses viewed by the sequence program of the PMC are set
by the programmer.
For input modules, an input signal becomes 1 when the contact point
connected with the input is turned ON. For output modules, an output
contact point (or transistor) is turned ON when the output signal is 1.

6.3.11
Number of I/O Points
for I/O UnitMODEL A

Determine the number of I/O points for the I/O UnitMODEL A using the
following.
(1) Output points
Sum of the actual output
points in a group
D 0 to 32

D 40 to 64

D 72 to 128

D 136 to 256

Occupied output points


32 points
64 points
128 points
256 points

NOTE
Count AOA05E as 8 points and AOA12F as 16 points.

(2) Input points


Sum of the actual input
points in a group
D 0 to 32

D 40 to 64

D 72 to 128

D 136 to 256

145

Occupied input points


32 points
64 points
128 points
256 points

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

However, as a result of the calculation above, when the number of


input points is not larger than that of the output points in a single
group, the number of input points is assumed to be equal to that of
the output points.
Example 1: When the following modules are used in the group
No. 0
AOD32C 3
AID32A 5
AOA12F 2
AIA16G 3
[Output points]
323+162 = 128 128 points
[Input points]
325+163 = 208 256 points
Example 2: When the following modules are used in the group
No. 2.
AOD16C 7
AID16C 4
AOA05E 9
AIA16G 3
[Output points]
167+89 = 184 256 points
[Input points]
164+163 = 112 128 points
In this case, as the number of input points is smaller than that of the
output points, the number of input points is assumedl to be equal
to that of the output points, in other words, 256 points.

146

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.4
CONNECTING THE
CONNECTION UNIT

A connection unit (A20B10050310 or A20B10030200) is


connected to the control unit of the Series 15B via FANUC I/O Link and
used for interfacing with the machine.
Electrical interfaces and pin assignment for connectors C01 to C05 and
C09 to C13 used for interfacing with the machine are fully compatible
with the connection unit of the Series 15A. The numbers of input and
output points for each configuration are listed below.
Name

Ordering code

Input

Output

Connection unit 1

A02B10050310

96

64

Connection unit 1
+
Connection unit 2

A20B10050310
+
A20B10030200

192

128

Ground the connection unit 1/2.

M4 screw

147

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 1
A20B10050310
Series 15B
control unit
To the next device

or
I/O unit

If there is no equipment beyond this


connection unit, JD1A can remain open.

3pin connector (brown)


manufactured by
FCI Japan
Housing: SMS3PNS5
Contact: RC16MSCT3
To the machine

Connection unit 2
A20B10030200

Power input specifications


Voltage:
24 VDC " 10%
Capacity: 670 + 7.3 n (mA): When only connection unit 1 is
used
1150 + 7.3 n (mA): When connection unit 1 and
connection unit 2 are used
n: Number of input points which are simultaneously turned
on
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power
cable.

148

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.4.1

(a) Between CP52 and CP55

Connecting
Connection Unit 1 and
Connection Unit 2
CP52
1

+5 V

+5 V

0V

0V

CP55
5

+24 V +24 N

+5 V

+5 V

0V

0V

+24 V +24 N

Connectors SMS6PN5

Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power cable.

149

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(b) Between CDD1 and CDD2


Connection Unit 1

Connection Unit 2

CDD1
FAP501
A01

0V

CDD2
FAP501
B01

0V

A01

0V

B01

A02

B02

A02

B02

A03

B03

A03

B03

B04

A04

A04

0V

A05

B05

A06

B06

0V

Cable

0V

0V

B04

A05

B05

A06

B06

0V

A07

*D7

B07

*D6

A07

*D7

B07

*D6

A08

*D5

B08

*D5

A08

*D5

B08

*D5

A09

0V

B09

*D3

A09

0V

B09

*D3

A10

*D2

B10

*D1

A10

*D2

B10

*D1

A11

*D0

B11

0V

A11

*D0

B11

0V

A12

0V

B12

0V

A12

0V

B12

0V

A13

AU

B13

A4

A13

AU

B13

A4

A14

A3

B14

0V

A14

A3

B14

0V

A15

A2

B15

A1

A15

A2

B15

A1

A16

A0

B16

0V

A16

A0

B16

0V

A17

*OE

B17

0V

A17

*OE

B17

0V

A18

0V

B18

0V

A18

0V

B18

0V

A19

*DVWE

B19

0V

A19

*DVWE

B19

0V

A20

0V

B20

A20

0V

B20

A21

0V

B21

0V

A21

0V

B21

0V

A22

*ALRO

B22

0V

A22

*ALRO

B22

0V

A23

*CLR

B23

EN

A23

*CLR

B23

EN

B24

0V

A24

B24

0V

A24
A25

*ASIO

B25

A25

*ASIO

B25

The following cable is available.


Name

Ordering code

Length

Cable

A02B0072K818

150mm

Maximum wire length: 1 m


Connectors at the ends of the cable:
FAS5017 (A63L00010209#50)

150

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.4.2

Input signals for the connection unit conform to a noninsulation type


interface. There are two input types: Direct current input signal A and
direct current input signal B.

Input Signal
Regulations for the
Connection Unit

Machine

(1) Direct current input signal A


Direct current input signal A is a signal sent to the CNC from the
machine, e.g., from a button, limit switch, relay contact, or proximity
switch.
(a) The contacts on the machine must meet the following
requirements:
Contact capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current between contacts when the circuit is open: 1 mA
or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed: 2 V or
less (Current: 8.5 mA)
(Including the voltage drop through the cable)
(b) Fig. 6.4.2 (a) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.
CNC
Direct
current input
signal
Filter and level
convention circuit

Receiver
output
signal
Logical 0 when the
contact is open
Logical 1 when the
contact is closed

+24 V
Receiver circuit

Fig. 6.4.2 (a) Receiver circuit

Fig. 6.4.2 (b) shows the time specifications for the signal.
(Signal)

(Signal)
Logical 1
(18 V or more)

Direct current
input signal closed

Logical 0
(6 V or less)

Open
Chattering of 5 ms or less is ignored

Receiver output signal

5 to 22 ms

5 to 22 ms

Fig. 6.4.2 (b) Width and delay time of the input signal

151

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(2) Direct current input signal B


Direct current input signal B is a signal sent from the machine to the
CNC and used at high speed.
(a) The contacts on the machine must meet the following
requirements:
Contact capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current between contacts when the circuit is open:
1 mA or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed:
2 V or less (Current: 8.5 mA)
(Including the voltage drop through the cable)
(b) Fig. 6.4.2 (c) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.
Machine

CNC
Receiver
output
Filter and level
conversion circuit

R
+24 V
Output transistor

Receiver circuit

Fig. 6.4.2 (c) Receiver circuit

As shown in Fig. 6.4.2 (c), the common voltage for the connection
unit can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on the
machine.
(a) To use the connection unit with the +24 V common voltage
Connect
A with
B and
C with
D . Logical 0 when the
transistor is off. Logical 1 when the transistor is on.
(b) To use with the 0 V common voltage
Connect
A with
D and
B with
C . Logical 1 when the
transistor is off. Logical 0 when the transistor is on.
Fig. 6.4.2. (d) shows the time specifications for the signal.
Direct current
input signal

Logical 1
(18 V or higher)

Logical 0
(6 V or lower)

Logical 0
(6 V or higher)

Logical 1
(18 V or lower)

ON
OFF

(For +24 V common)

Receiver
output signal
2 ms max

2 ms max

Fig. 6.4.2 (d) Width and delay time of the input signal

152

(For 0 V common)

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.4.3
Output Signal
Regulations for the
Connection Unit

The output signals from the connection unit are used for driving relays and
light emitting diodes for indication on the machine. A semiconductor
contact is used as a driver. The output type is direct current output signal
A.
(1) Direct current output signal A
(a) Driver ratings
(i) Maximum load current when the output is on: 250 mA or less
including an instantaneous value
(ii)Maximum voltage drop when the output is on: 6IL (volts),
where IL is the load current
(Example) When IL = 250 mA, 6 0.25 = 1.5 (V)
(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off: 50 V or less including
an instantaneous value
(iv) Leakage current when the output is off: 100 mA or less
Machine

CNC

Relay
Regulated power
supply on the
machine

Semiconductor
contact

(b) When an inductive load such as a relay is connected to the machine,


mount a spark killer as near the load as possible (20 cm or less).
When a capacitive load is connected to the machine, insert a serial
resistor to limit the current so that the rated current and voltage are
ensured even for an instantaneous value.
(c) When the lamp is turned on directly by the solidstate relay output,
a surge current may flow and damage the driver. Add a protective
circuit shown below so that the rated current and voltage are
ensured even for an instantaneous value.
Lamp
CNC

Semiconductor

Protective resistor

Regulated power
supply

153

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

6.4.4

B62073E/04

(1) Connection unit 1

Connector Pin
Assignment for the
Connection Unit
C01
1

MR50RMA
2

DIB5

DIB1

DIB6

19

20

21

0V

DIB7

DIB4

33

34

35

36

37

+24

DIB2

DIB0

DIB3

COMI1

C02

22

23

38

24

39

25

40

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

DI44

DI40

DI45

DI16

DI60

49

50

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

DI26

DI37

DI06

DI33

DI50

DI62

51

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

DI32

DI36

DI31

DI35

DI30

DI34

DI63

DI61

15

DI56

MR50RMA

10

11

12

13

14

DI52

DI65

DI64

DI91

DI92

DI95

DI41

DI77

DI47

DI46

DI73

DI74

DI53

DI67

29

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

DI93

DI94

DI90

DI22

DI12

DI02

DI97

DI55

DI43

DI42

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

+24

DI07

DI17

DI27

DI23

DI13

DI03

DI96

DI57

DI70

C03

16

17

18

DI05

DI15

DI25

30

31

32

DI82

DI81

DI80

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

DI71

DI72

DI00

DI01

DI10

DI11

DI20

DI21

11

12

MR50RMA

10

DIA0

DIA1

DIA2

DI80

DI81

DI82

DI85

DI86

DI66

DI87

13

14

15

16

17

18

DIA7

DIA6

DO26

COM12

DO27

COM13

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

DIA3

DIA4

DIA5

DI83

DO67

DO66

DO65

DO64

DO63

DO62

DO61

DO60

DO22

COM17

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

+24V

DI04

DI14

DI24

DI84

DI54

DI75

DI76

DO77

DO76

DO75

DO74

DO73

DO72

DO71

DO70

DO23

COM18

14

15

C04

MR50RMA

10

11

12

13

DO04

0V

0V

0V

DO03

COM1

COM16

DO57

DO55

DO54

DO56

DO12

MOM6

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

COM4

DO01

DO30

DO31

DO32

DO33

COM14

DO13

DO21

COM9

COM5

COM2

COM11

DO07

16

17

18

COM10

DO24

COM3

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

DO05

DO10

DO00

DO02

DO34

DO35

DO36

DO37

DO20

COM7

DO17

DO11

DO06

DO25

COM8

DO14

DO15

DO16

10

11

12

13

C05
1

MR20RMA

COM15 COM15

DO40

DO41

DO42

DO43

DO44

DO45

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

DO46

DO47

DO50

DO51

DO52

DO53

154

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(2) Connection unit 2


C09
1

MR50RMA
2

DI75

DI71

DI76

19

20

21

10

11

12

13

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

DIE6

DIF7

DIC6

DIF3

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

DIF2

DIF6

DIF1

DIF5

0V

DI177

DI174

33

34

35

36

37

+24

DI172

DI170

DI173

COM12

C10

14

15

16

17

18

DI104

DI100

DI105

DID6

DI102

31

32

DI110

DI122

DI111

45

46

47

48

49

DIF0

DIF4

DI123

DI121

15

50
DI116

MR50RMA

10

11

12

13

14

DI112

DI125

DI124

DI151

DI152

DI155

DI101

DI137

DI107

DI106

DI133

DI134

DI113

DI127

29

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

DI153

DI154

DI150

DIE2

DID2

DIC2

DI157

DI115

DI103

DI102

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

+24

DIC7

DID7

DIE7

DIE3

DID3

DIC3

DI156

DI117

DI130

10

DI160

DI161

DI162

DI140

DI141

DI142

DI145

DI146

DI126

DI147

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

C11

16

17

18

DIC5

DID5

DIE5

30

31

32

DI142

DI141

DI140

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

DI131

DI132

DIC0

DIC1

DID0

DID1

DIE0

DIE1

11

12

MR50RMA
13

14

15

16

17

18

DI167

DI166

DOA6

COM30

DOA7

COM31

29

30

31

32
COM35

DI163

DI164

DI165

DI143

DOE7

DOE6

DOE5

DOE4

DOE3

DOE2

DOE1

DOE0

DOA2

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

+24

DIC4

DID4

DIE4

DI144

DI114

DI135

DI136

DOF7

DOF6

DOF5

DOF4

DOF3

DOF2

DOF1

DOF1

DOA3

COM36

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

DO84

0V

0V

0V

DO83

COM19

COM34

DOD7

DOD5

DOD4

DOD6

DO92

COM24

COM28

DOA4

COM21

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32
DO87

C12

MR50RMA

COM22

DO81

DOB0

DOB1

DOB2

DOB3

COM32

DO93

DOA1

COM27

COM27

COM20

COM29

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

49

50

DO85

DO90

DO80

DO82

DOB4

DOB5

DOB6

DOB7

DOA0

COM25

DO97

DO91

DO86

DOA5

COM26

DO94

DO95

DO96

C13
1

MR20RMA
2

COM33 COM33
19

20

21

22

23

24

DOC0

DOC1

DOC2

DOC3

DOC4

DOC5

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

DOC6

DOC7

DOD0

DOD1

DOD2

DOD3

155

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.4.5
Details of the
Connection between
the Connection Unit
and the Machine
Connection unit 1

Connector pin
number

Address number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.

156

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 1

Connector pin
number

Address number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.

157

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 1

Connector pin
number

Address number
Bit number

Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.
DI82 to DI80 are assigned to two connector pins each.

158

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 1

Address number
Connector pin
number

Bit number

Direct current
input signal B

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.
The common voltage for DIB7 to DIB0 can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on
the machine. The above figure shows the connection when the +24 V common voltage is used.
The common voltage is common to DIB7 to DIB0. It is therefore not possible to use a signal
with the +24 V common voltage and another signal with the 0 V common voltage.

159

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number

Bit number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DO05 to DO00 are connected in connection unit 1 (COM1).
The common voltages for DO16 to DO14 are connected in connection unit 1 (COM8).

160

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number

Bit number
Address number

Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.

161

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number

Bit number
Address number

Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DO21, DO20, and DO37 to DO30 are connected in connection unit
1 (COM14).
The common voltages for DO57 to DO54 are connected in connection unit 1 (COM16).

162

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number

Bit number
Address number
Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DO22 and DO67 to DO60 are connected in connection unit 1
(COM17).
The common voltages for DO23 and DO77 to DO70 are connected in connection unit 1
(COM18).

163

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 1
Connector pin
number

Bit number
Address number

C05 (15)
Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DO47 to DO40 and DO53 to DO50 are connected in connection unit
1 (COM15).

164

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 2

Address number
Connector pin number

Bit number
Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.

165

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 2

Connector pin number

Address number
Bit number
Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.

166

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 2

Address number
Connector pin number

Bit number
Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.
DI142 to DI140 are assigned to two connector pins each.

167

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 2

Address number
Connector pin number

Bit number

Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number n.
The common voltage for DI177 to DI170 can be selected from +24 V and 0 V by the wiring on
the machine. The above figure shows the connection when the +24 V common voltage is used.
The common voltage is common to DI177 to DI170. It is therefore not possible to use a signal
with the +24 V common voltage and another signal with the 0 V common voltage.

168

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 2
Connector pin
number

Bit number
Address number

Direct current input


signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DO85 to DO80 are connected in connection unit 2 (COM19).
The common voltages for DO96 to DO94 are connected in connection unit 2 (COM26).

169

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 2
Connector pin
number

Bit number
Address number

Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.

170

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 2
Connector pin
number

Bit number
Address number

Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DOA1, DOA0, and DOB7 to DOB0 are connected in connection unit
2 (COM32).
The common voltages for DOD7 to DOD4 are connected in connection unit 2 (COM34).

171

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 2
Connector pin
number

Bit number
Address number

Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DOA2 and DOE7 to DOE0 are connected in connection unit 2
(COM35).
The common voltages for DOA3 and DOF7 to DOF0 are connected in connection unit 2
(COM36).

172

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Connection unit 2
Bit number

Connector pin
number

Address number
Direct current
input signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number m.
The common voltages for DOC7 to DOC0 and DOD3 to DOD0 are connected in connection
unit 2 (COM33).

173

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.4.6
External View of the
Connection Unit

174

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.5
CONNECTION OF
OPERATORS PANEL
CONNECTION UNIT

The operators panel connection unit (A16B22000660, 0661) is


connected to the Series 15B control unit through the FANUC I/O Link
and is used for interfacing with the machine operators panel.
The electric interface and pin layout of the connectors CM1 to CM4 are
fully compatible with those for Series 15A. There are two units available
depending on the number of I/O points.
Specification

Input

Output

A16B22000660

96

64

A16B22000661

64

32

Operators panel connection unit


A16B22000660,0661
Series 15B control unit

JD1A
JD1A

JD1B

To next device

or I/O unit
If there is no equipment beyond
this connection u nit, JD1A can
remain open.

DC24 V

BURNDY 3P

CP61

CM1

CONNECTOR
(Brown)

Housing:

SMS3PNS5

Contact:

RC16MSCT3
1

+24 V

GND

CM2

CM3

Machine
operators
panel

CM4

Power supply input specification


Voltage: 24 VDC" 10%
Capacity:500 + 7.3 n mA
n: number of inputs ON simultaneously
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power cable.
Grounding of the operators panel connection unit
Ground mounting plate.

175

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

6.5.1

B62073E/04

Input signals for the operators panel connection unit conform to a


noninsulation type interface. The input type is direct current input signal
A.

Input Signal
Regulations for the
Operators Panel
Connection Unit

(1) Direct current input signal A


Direct current input signal A is a signal sent to the CNC from the
machine, e.g., from a button, limit switch, relay contact, or proximity
switch.
(a) The contacts on the machine must meet the following
requirements:
Contact capacity: 30 VDC, 16 mA or more
Leakage current between contacts when the circuit is open: 1 mA
or less (Voltage: 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts when the circuit is closed: 2 V or
less (Current: 8.5 mA)
(Including the voltage drop through the cable)
(b) Fig. 6.5.1 (a) shows the receiver circuit for the signal.

Machine

CNC
Direct
current
input signal
Filter and level
conversion circuit

+24 V
Receiver circuit

Receiver
output
signal
Logical 1 when
the contact is
open
Logical 0 when
the contact is
closed

Fig. 6.5.1 (a) Receiver circuit

Fig. 6.5.1 (b) shows the time specifications for the signal.
(Signal)

(Signal)
Logical 0
(18 V or more)

Direct current input


signal closeed

Logical 1
(6 V or less)

Open
Chattering of 5 ms
or less is ignoared

Receiver output signal

5 to 22 ms

5 to 22 ms

Fig. 6.5.1 (b) Width and delay time of the input signal

176

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.5.2
Output Signal
Regulations for the
Operators Panel
Connection Unit

The output signals from the operators panel connection unit are used for
driving lamps and light emitting diodes on the machine operators panel.
An NPN transistor is used as a driver. The output type is direct current
output signal B.
(1) Direct current output signal B
The direct current output signal B is used for driving relays and light
emitting diodes for indication on the machine. A transistor is used as
a driver.
(a) Ratings of the output transistor
(i) Maximum load current when output is ON: 200 mA (including
momentary load)
(ii)Saturation voltage when output is ON: 1.6 V (maximum)/1.0 V
(normal) (when load current is 200 mA)
The maximum load current is limited to 1.3 A per common wire
(Note).
NOTE
Although a maximum load current of 200 mA is permitted
when the output is ON, the load current allowed to flow
through a common wire is limited to 1.3 A. Therefore, the
load current of the output transistor must satisfy the
following condition:
(N I)/Mt 1.3 A
Where N = Number of DO points that can be turned on
simultaneously
I = Load current that flows when output is ON
M =Number of common wires (one or two)
Example:When there are 64 DO points that can be turned on
simultaneously and two common wires are used, the rated load
current is 40 mA, calculated as shown below:
(64 I) / 2t 1.3 A
It 40 mA
(iii)Withstand voltage when the output is off: 24 V + 20% or less
including an instantaneous value
(iv) Leakage current when the output is off: 100 mA or less

177

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(b) Output circuit

CNC

Machine
+

Relay

Regulated power
supply on the
machine

Transistor output circuit

(c) When an inductive load such as a relay is connected to the


machine, mount a spark killer as near the load as possible (20
cm or less). When a capacitive load is connected to the machine,
insert a serial resistor for limiting the current so that the rated
current and voltage are ensured even for an instantaneous value.
(d) When the lamp is turned OFF, its resistance becomes extremely
low. So, when the lamp is turned on directly by transistor
output, surge current may flow and damage the transistor. For
this reason, add a protective circuit as shown below.

Lamp

CNC

Regulated
power
supply

Protective resistor

178

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.5.3
Connector Layout for
Operators Panel
Connection Unit
Address

Note) DI80 to DIB7 can be used only for the


A16B22000660.

NOTE
Address No. n can be decided by machine tool builders.

179

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Address

Note) DO40 to DO77 can be used only for the


A16B22000660.

NOTE
Address No. n can be decided by machine tool builders.

180

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.5.4
Details of the
Connection between
the Operators Panel
Connection Unit and
the Machine
Operators panel connection unit
Connector terminal number

Address number
Bit number
Direct current input
signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number p.

181

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Operators panel connection unit

Connector terminal number


Address number
Bit number
Direct current input
signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number p.

182

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Operators panel connection unit

Connector terminal number


Address number
Bit number
Direct current input
signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number p.

183

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Operators panel connection unit

Connector terminal number


Address number
Bit number
Direct current input
signal A

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number p.

184

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Operators panel connection unit

Connector terminal number

Bit number
Address number

Example of connection

(*)

Direct current input


signal A

+24 V
regulated
power
supply

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number q.
The common voltages for DO57 to DO00 are connected in the operators panel connection unit
(COM3).
+5 V output for supplying the power to the light emitting diode on the operators panel. The
output voltage is +5 VDC and the current is 300 mA. The power capacity is not enough to drive
the lamp. A separate regulated power supply is necessary for the lamp. The load capacity of
the output driver refer to 6.5.2.

185

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Operators panel connection unit

Connector terminal number

Example of connection

Bit number
Address number

Direct current input


signal A

+24 V
regulated
power
supply

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number q.
The common voltages for DO57 to DO00 are connected in
the operators panel connection unit (COM3).

186

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Operators panel connection unit

Connector terminal number

Example of connection

Bit number
Address number

Direct current input


signal A

+24 V
regulated
power
supply

NOTE
The machine tool builder can determine address number q.
The common voltages for DO67 to DO70 are connected in
the operators panel connection unit (COM4).

187

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.5.5
External View of
Operators Panel
Connection Unit

Approx.

Fig. 6.5.5 External view of operators panel connection unit

The following LEDs and fuses are mounted on this printed circuit board.
[LEDs]
DB1 (GREEN PILOT): Lights when this PCB is ON.
DB2 (RED ALARM) : Lights when an error occurs on this PCB or
CNC.
[Fuses]
FU1 (3.2 A): For external 24 V input
FU2 (5.0 A): For +5 V power supply used on this PCB
Ordering specification A02B0163K111 (FU1/FU2 2fuse set)

188

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.6
CONNECTION OF
SOURCE OUTPUT
OPERATORS PANEL
CONNECTION UNIT

The source output operators panel connection unit (A16B22020730,


or 0731) is connected to Series 15B control units by the FANUC I/O
Link, and functions as the interface with the machine tool operators
panel.
Output from this connection unit is sourcetype. Input is sinktype
(24 V common). However, some connection units have DI that can be
switched to sourcetype input (0 V common).
Two connection units are available according to the number of I/Os.
Specification

Input

Output

A16B22020730

96

64

A16B22020731

64

32

Source output operators panel connection unit


A16B22020730,0731
Control unit series 15B

JD1A

JDIA

JD1B

To next device

or
If there is are no devices beyond this connection unit, JD1A may be left open.

I/O unit

DC24 V

CP61

CM51

Japan FCI 3pole Connector (brown)

CM52

Housing: SMS3PNS5
Contact: RC16MSCT3
CMB3
1

+24 V

GND

Machine
operators
panel

CMB4

Power supply input specification


Voltage: 24 VDC" 10%
Capacity: 500) 7.3 n (mA)
n: number of inputs ON simultaneously
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power cable.
Grounding of the operators panel connection unit
Ground mounting
plate

189

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

6.6.1
Source Output
Operators Panel
Connection Unit Input
Signal Standard

B62073E/04

The input signal to the source output operators panel connection unit is
input over a noninsulated interface, and is called DC input signal A.
(1) DC input signal A
DC input signal A is sent to the NC from the machine tool by
pushbuttons, limit switches, relay contacts and proximity switches.
Most receivers are sink types. However, some inputs can be switched
to source type. (Use of sinktype receivers is required in safety
standards.)
(a) Satisfy the machineside contact conditions:
Contact capacitance: 30 VDC, 16 mA min.
Leak current between contacts in open circuit:
1 mA min. (voltage 26.4 V)
Voltage drop between contacts in closed circuit:
2 V max. (including cable voltage drop)
(b) Input receiver circuit
Source output operators panel connection unit

Sinktype connection:
safety standard compliant
(24 V common)
Input signal

Filter and level


conversion circuit
R
+24 V

+24 V

Fig. 6.6.1 (a) Sinktype receiver circuit

190

Receiver
output
signal

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(c) Circuit of common switchable input receiver


Source output operators panel connection unit

Sinktype connection: safety standard


compliant (24 V common)
Input signal

Filter and level


conversion circuit

Contact

Receiver
output
signal

DICMN
+24 V
+24 V

0V
Sourcetype connection
(0 V common)
Input signal

Filter and level


conversion circuit

Contact

Receiver
output
signal

DICMN
+24 V
+24 V

0V

Fig. 6.6.1 (b) Common switchable receiver circuit

Figure 6.6.1 (c) below shows the signal timing standard.


(Signal)

(Signal)
Logic 1
(18 V or more)

DC input signal open

Logic 0
(6 V or less)

Closed
Chattering of 5 ms or
less is ignored.

Receiver output
signal
5 to 22ms

5 to 22ms

Fig. 6.6.1 (c) Width and delay time of input signal

DC input signals are logic 1 when High, and logic 0 when Low.

191

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

Sinktype input signals are logic 0 when the contact is open, and logic
1 when closed.
Sourcetype input signals are logic 1 when the contact is open, and
logic 0 when closed.

NOTE
If the output signal line falls to ground when the input signal
is sourcetype (0 V common), the state is the same when
the contact is closed. For this reason, sourcetype input
signals are not recommended for ensuring safety.
By CEmarking compliancy, sinktype (+24 V common)
input signals are required.

6.6.2
Output Signal Standard
for Source Output
Operators Panel
Connection Unit

The output signal of the source output operators panel connection unit
is for driving lamps and LEDs on the machine tool operators panel. A
MOS FET is used as the driver.
(1) Direct current output signal
The DC output signal is used for driving relays and light emitting
diodes for indication on the machine. A transistor is used as the driver.
(a) Output signal standard is as follows:
Maximum load current when output is ON:
200 mA (including momentary load)
Saturation voltage when output is ON: 1.0 V max.
Withstand voltage: 24 V + 20% (including momentary load)
Leaking current when the output is OFF: 100 mA
Use the following power supply as the external power supply of the
output signal:
Power voltage:

+24 V" 10%

Power current:

Sum of maximum load current including


momentary current per board + 100 mA
min.

Power ON timing:

Same time as or before control unit

Power OFF timing:

Same time as or after control unit

NOTE
Connect the power supply that meets these specifications
to power terminals DOCOM and 0 V for the output signals.
The maximum current that is allowed to pass to each
DOCOM terminal pin is 2.0 A, and care must be paid to
prevent the sum of the load current from exceeding the
current that is allowed to pass via the DOCOM terminal.

192

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

(b) Output signal driver


Eight signals are output from each of the output signal driver
elements used on this operators panel connection unit.
The current of each output signal is monitored in the driver
element. When overcurrent is detected, output of that signal is
turned OFF. Once signal output is turned OFF due to overcurrent,
signal output is restored to ON as turning signal output OFF
eliminates the overcurrent state. For this reason, output is
repeatedly switched ON and OFF when the output signal falls to
ground or when it is in an overcurrent state. This also happens when
a large surge current load is connected.
The driver element also has an overheat detection circuit. When the
overcurrent state is continuous due to outputs having fallen to
ground and the temperature inside the element rises, output of all
eight signals is turned OFF and this OFF state is held. Output is
restored for each individual signal by temporarily setting output
logically OFF after the temperature inside the element has dropped.
Signal output can also be restored by powering OFF the system.
When the overheat detection circuit is activated on this printed
circuit board, the red LEDs mounted next to the driver element
light so that you can confirm activation of the overheat detection
circuit. (See Note.) When the overheat detection circuit is
activated, the CNC is notified of an alarm as a system alarm. (You
can also disable notification to the CNC system of this alarm by
closing (shorting) the short bar of setting pin CP1 mounted on this
printed circuit board. When notification is disabled, this alarm is
not treated as a system alarm.)
Correspondence between red LED and DO output signal
Red LED Name

DO Output Signal

DAL1

Y q+0.0 to Y q+0.7

DAL2

Y q+1.0 to Y q+1.7

DAL3

Y q+2.0 to Y q+2.7

DAL4

Y q+3.0 to Y q+3.7

DAL5

Y q+4.0 to Y q+4.7

DAL6

Y q+5.0 to Y q+5.7

DAL7

Y q+6.0 to Y q+6.7

DAL8

Y q+7.0 to Y q+7.7

Remarks

NOTE
Lighting of the red LEDs and transfer alarm to CNC function
are supported on printed circuit board 03B onwards.

193

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

If the CNC diagnoses that output does not turn ON even though it is ON,
a probable cause is that overloading of that output or other output in the
same element is causing the eight outputs of that element to stay OFF. If
this is the case, power the system OFF, and remove the cause of the
overload.
Driver device internal block diagram
DOCOM
OHD

IN#0

CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#0
OCD

IN#1

CONTROL
LOGIC
OUT#1
OCD

.
.
.

.
.
.

IN#7

CONTROL
LOGIC

.
.
.

.
.
.

OUT#7
OCD

OHD: Overheat detection circuit


OCD: Overcurrent detection circuit
The power supply for operation of this driver device is DOCOM (24 VDC).

(c) Output signal precautions


The figure below shows the precautions when connecting output
signals. Parallel connection of output terminals shown like that
shown in this figure is prohibited.
DOCOM

+24 V 0 V

Relay
DV
DV
0V

194

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

NOTE
If the output signal falls to ground when the output signal is
sinktype (0 V common), the output signal stays ON. For
this reason, sinktype output signals are not recommended
for ensuring safety.
By CEmarking compliancy, sourcetype (+24 V common)
output signals are required.

6.6.3
ALARM LEDs on
Source Output
Operators Panel
Connection Unit

A16B22020730
A16B22020731
CP1
ALARM
DAL7
DAL8

DAL2

DAL3

DAL5

DAL1

DAL4

DAL6

ALARM out: Normal state


ALARM lit: Alarm state (communications with CNC suspended)
The source output operators manual connection unit is provided with a
function for detecting and outputting an alarm for excessive current
flowing to the output driver device caused by DO falling to ground.
When the above alarm is detected, the CNC outputs a system alarm, and
the LED corresponding to the DO where the alarm occurred lights. See
the following table for details on which LED lights.
You can also disable output of the output driver alarm as a CNC system
alarm by the onboard setting pin CP1.
If falling to ground of the DO causes excessive current to flow to the
output driver device.

195

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

DAL1
DAL2
DAL3
DAL4
DAL5
DAL6
DAL7
DAL8

out: Normal state


lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+0.0 to Yq+0.7
out: Normal state
lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+1.0 to Yq+1.7
out: Normal state
lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+2.0 to Yq+2.7
out: Normal state
lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+3.0 to Yq+3.7
out: Normal state
lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+4.0 to Yq+4.7
out: Normal state
lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+5.0 to Yq+5.7
out: Normal state
lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+6.0 to Yq+6.7
out: Normal state
lit: Error occurred on DO outputs Yq+7.0 to Yq+7.7

System alarms generated by the above alarms are as follows.


For details, refer to Appendix C. 3 (3) (18) SLC ERROR of the FANUC
Series 15/150MODEL B Maintenance Manual (B62075).
SLCERROR aa(bb) Example SLC ERROR 03(41)
(aa: XXXXXX11
Binary bits 0 and 1 are 1. Other bits are not fixed.)
(bb: X1XXXXX1
Binary bit 6 is 1. Bits other than bit 0 to 4, and 6 are not fixed.)
The value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value indicated by bits 0
to 4 is the I/O group number where the error occurred.
The above example shows I/O alarms that have occurred in group O.
Setting pin CP1 settings are as follows:
Open: CNC is not notified of alarm.
Short: CNC is notified of alarm.

196

6. CONNECTION OF I/O UNITS TO


MACHINE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

6.6.4

(a) Connector pin assignment

Connector Pin
Assignment Addresses
of Source Output
Operators Panel
Connection Unit
CM51

CM52

DI00

33

DICMN1

DI60

33

0V

DI03

34

DI02

DI63

34

DI62

DI06

35

DI05

DI66

35

DI65

DI11

36

DI10

DI71

36

DI70

DI14

37

DI13

DI74

37

DI73

DI17

38

DI16

DI77

38

DI76

DI22

39

DI21

DI82

39

DI81

DI25

40

DI24

DI85

40

DI84

DI27

41

DI26

DI87

41

DI86

10

DI32

42

DI31

10

DI92

42

DI91

11

DI35

43

DI34

11

DI95

43

DI94

12

DI40

44

DI37

12

DIA0

13

DI43

45

DI42

13

DIA3

14

DI46

46

DI45

14

DIA6

15

DI51

47

DI50

15

DIB1

16

DI54

48

DI53

16

DIB4

17

DI56

49

DI55

17

18

+24 V

50

DI57

18

DO00

33

0V

DO03

34

DO02

DO06

35

DO05

36

DO10

DO61

37

DO13

DO64

38

DO16

DO67

39

DO21

DO72

40

DO24

DO75

41

DO26

DO56

42

DO31

0V

43

DO34

44

DO37

45

DO42

46

DO45

47

DO50

48

DO53

19

DI01

20

DI04

21

DI07

22

DI12

23

DI15

24

DI20

25

DI23

26

DI30

27

DI33

28

DI36

29

DI41

30

DI44

31

DI47

32

DI52

19

DI61

20

DI64

21

DI67

22

DI72

23

DI75

24

DI80

25

DI83

26

DI90

27

DI93

28

DI96

29

DIA1

30

DIA4

31

DIA7

32

DIB2

44

DI97

45

DIA2

46

DIA5

47

DIB0

48

DIB3

DIB6

49

DIB5

+24 V

50

DIB7

14

DO60

15

DO63

16

DO66

17

DO71

18

DO74

CMB3

19

DO01

20

DO04

21

DO07

22

DO12

23

DO15

24

DO20

25

DO23

26

DO30

27

DO33

28

DO36

29

DO41

30

DO44

31

DO47

32

DO52

DO11

DO14

DO17

DO22

DO25

DO27

10

DO32

11

DO35

12

DO40

13

DO43

14

DO46

15

DO51

16

DO54

17

DOCOM

49

DO55

18

DICMN2

50

DOCOM

CMB4
8

DO62

DO65

10

DO70

11

DO73

12

DO76

13

DO57

19

DO77

20

DOCOM

NOTE
Connector CNB4 is not mounted on this PCB when operators panel connection unit (DI/DO
64/32) is selected.

197

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

208

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1
CRT/MDI UNIT
INTERFACE
7.1.1

(1) Standard

Outline
CRT/MDI, PDP/MDI or LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


CP4

ON
COM
OFF

See 5.2
ON1
Shortcircuit

ON BUTTON

ON2
OFF1

OFF BUTTON

OFF2

CRT, PDP, LCD UNIT

CP2, CP3 or CP5

See 7.1.2 to 7.1.4

CN2

PDP POWER

CP11

CRT POWER

CP5

LCD POWER

MAIN CPU BOARD


JA1

See 7.1.2 to 7.1.4

CN1, JA1 VIDEO SIGNAL

SOFT KEY CABLE

KEYBOARD PCB
JA2

CK2

See 7.1.9 and 7.1.10

CK1

OPTION1 BOARD
(When the graphic
display function is used) JA1

Ground for protection.

209

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(2) Standard (When LCD/MDI unit with builtin graphic function is


used)

LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


CP4

ON
COM
OFF

See 5.2
ON1
Shortcircuit

ON BUTTON

ON2
OFF1

OFF BUTTON

OFF2

LCD WITH GRAPHIC FUNCTION

CP5

See 7.1.6

CP5 LCD POWER

MAIN CPU BOARD


JA1

See 7.1.6

JN1
JA2
SOFT KEY CABLE

See 7.1.9

KEYBOARD PCB

CNK2

CNK1

Ground for protection.

210

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(3) MMCII
CRT/MDI
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
CP4

See 5.2

ON
OFF
COM

ON/OFF BUTTON
M4 TERMINAL
(14 horizontal CRT/MDI)
TAB#10
(14 vertical CRT/MDI)

CRT UNIT
See 7.1.2
CP2, CP3 or CP5

CN2 CRT POWER

MMCII GRAPHIC BOARD


See 7.1.2
JA1

CN1 VIDEO INPUT

KEYBOARD PCB
MAIN CPU BOARD
See 7.1.9
JA2

CNK1

Ground for protection.

NOTE
The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

211

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(4) MMCIII
CRT/MDI, PDP/MDI or LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


CP4

See 5.2

ON

ON1

COM

Short
circuit

OFF

ON BUTTON

ON2
OFF1

OFF BUTTON

OFF2

CRT, PDP, LCD BUTTON

CP2, CP3 or CP5

See 7.1.2 and 7.1.3

CP11

CRT POWER

CP5

LCD POWER

MMCIII CPU board


JA1A

See 7.1.2 and 7.1.3

JA1 VIDEO INPUT

See 7.1.11
SOFT KEY CABLE
JA1B
KEYBOARD PCB
OPTION1 BOARD
CK2

JA1

CK1
MAIN CPU BOARD
JA2
See 7.1.9

Ground for protection.

NOTE
The MMCIII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

212

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(5) MMCIV

CRT/MDI, LCD/MDI
ON/OFF BUTTON

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


CP4

See 5.2

ON

ON1

COM

Shortcircuit

OFF

ON BUTTON

ON2
OFF1

OFF BUTTON

OFF2

CRT UNIT

See 7.1.5
CP2, CP3 or CP5

CP11

CRT POWER

CP5

LCD POWER

MMCIV CPU BOARD


See 7.1.5
JA1A

JA1 VIDEO INPUT

See 7.1.9
SOFT KEY CABLE

JA1B

KEYBOARD PCU
MAIN CPU BOARD
See 7.1.9
JA2

CK2

CK1
OPTION 1 BOARD
JA1

Ground for protection.

NOTE
The MMCIV board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

213

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1.2
9 CRT or 9 PDP
Display Interface
(CE Marking
Noncompliant)
CNC

9 CRT/MDI or 9 PDP/MDI

JA1,JA1A
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

HIROSE
FI40A20S (Connector)
FI20CV5 (Case)
VSYNC

(Note 1)

0V
HONDA
MR20FH (Connector)
MR20LFH (Case)

0V

1
2
3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

VDR
HSYNC
VSYNC
VDG
VDB

1
2
3

200A
200B
G

8
9
10
11
12
13

0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

HSYNC

or
CP2
or
CP3

CN1
(MR20RM)

200A
200B
G

Japan FCI
SMS3PN5 (housing)
RC16M23T3 (contact)
RC16MSCT3 (contact)
(Note 2)

(In case of 9 color or 9


monochrome PDP)

Ground for protection.


GND

214

CN2
(SMS3RK3TK2)

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 SIGNAL CABLE WIRING

11

12

18

16

12

14

10

VDR

VDR

0V

0V

VDG

VDG

0V

0V

VDB

VDB

0V

0V

HSYNC

HSYNC

0V

0V

VSYNC

VSYNC

0V

0V

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010371 . . . coaxial cable: Max. 50 m
NOTE
2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.
3 There is a set place for the adjustment in the back of the
PDP/MDI unit. Refer to 7.1.7 for the adjustment method.

215

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1.3
9 CRT or PDP Display
Interface (CE Marking
Compliant)
CNC

9 CRT PDP/MDI unit

JA1 (main CPU, option 1 board)


(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

HIROSE
FI40A20A (connector)
FI20CV5 (case)

VSYNC

(Note 1)

0V
HONDA
MR20FH (connector)
MR20LFH (case)

0V
HSYNC

or
CP5

1
2
3

+24V
0V

1
2
3

(Note 2)
(In case of 9 monochrome CRT)

+24V
0V

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

VDR
HSYNC
VSYNC
VDG
VDB

8
9
10
11
12
13

0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

Japan FCI
SMS6PN5 (housing)
RC16M23T3 (contact)
RC16MSCT3 (contact)

AMP Japan 11781283(housing)


11752185 (contact)

CP5

CN1
(MR20RM)

Japan Crimped Terminal


VHR2N (housing)
SVH21T11 (contact)
(Note 2)

1
2
3
4
5
6

0V
0V
+24V
+24V

1
2

+24V
0V

(In case of 9 monochrome PDP)


Ground for protection.
GND

216

CN2
(SMS6RN4)

CN2
(B2PVH)

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 Signal cable wiring

11

12

18

16

12

14

10

VDR

VDR

0V

0V

VDG

VDG

0V

0V

VDB

VDB

0V

0V

HSYNC

HSYNC

0V

0V

VSYNC

VSYNC

0V

0V

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010371 . . . coaxial cable (max. 50 m)
NOTE
2 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.

217

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1.4
14 Analog CRT, 10.4
LCD, 9.5 LCD Display
Interface (CE Marking
Compliant when
MMCIV is not Used)
14 CRT/MDI unit
10.4 LCD/MDI unit
9.5 LCD/MDI unit

CNC
JA1 (option 1 board)
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V

CP2 or CP3
(AMP)

CP5
(AMP)

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

HIROSE
FI40A20S (connector)
FI20CV5 (case)
VSYNC

(Note 1)

0V
0V
HSYNC
AMP Japan
11781283(housing)
11752185 (contact)

1
2
3

200A
200B
G

1
2
3

+24V
0V

(Note 2)
In case of 14 CRT
(Note 3)
In case of LCD

JA1
(PCRE20LMD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V

1
2
3

200A
200B
G

CP11
(AMP)

1
2
3

+24V
0V

CP5
(AMP)

AMP Japan
117828883(housing)
11752185 (contact)
GND

Ground for protection.

218

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 Signal cable wiring

18

18

16

16

12

12

14

14

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V
HSYNC
0V
VSYNC
0V

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010731 . . . coaxial cable (max. 50 m)
NOTE
2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.
3 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.

219

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1.5
14 Analog CRT, 10.4
LCD, 9.5 LCD Display
Interface (CE Marking
Compliant when
MMCIV is Used)
14 CRT/MDI unit
10.4 LCD/MDI unit
9.5 LCD/MDI unit

CNC
JA1A (MMCIV board)
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V

CP2 or CP3
(AMP)

CP5
(AMP)

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

HIROSE
FI40A20S (connector)
FI20CV5 (case)
VSYNC

(Note 1)

0V
0V
HSYNC
AMP Japan
11781283(housing)
11752185 (contact)

1
2
3

200A
200B
G

1
2
3

+24V
0V

(Note 2)
In case of 14 CRT
(Note 3)
In case of LCD

JA1
(PCRE20LMD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V

1
2
3

200A
200B
G

CP11
(AMP)

1
2
3

+24V
0V

CP5
(AMP)

AMP Japan
21782883(housing)
11752185 (contact)
GND

Ground for protection.

220

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 Signal cable wiring

18

18

16

16

12

12

14

14

VDR

VDR

0V

0V

VDG

VDG

0V

0V

VDB

VDB

0V

0V

HSYNC

HSYNC

0V

0V

VSYNC

VSYNC

0V

0V

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010731 . . . coaxial cable (max. 20 m)
NOTE
2 Use three 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the po
wer cable.
3 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.
4 The MMCIV board cannot be used on the
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

221

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1.6
10.4 LCD Display
Interface (CE Marking
Compliant with Builtin
Graphic Function)
10.4 LCD/MDI unit

CNC
JA1 (main CPU board)
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

RXD
0V
0V
*RXD
0V

CP5
(AMP)

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

1
2
3

HIROSE
FI40A20S (connector)
FI20CV5 (case)
TXD

(Note 1)

0V
0V
*TXD

+24V
0V

(Note 2)

JN1
(PCRE20LMD)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

1
2
3

TXD
0V
0V
*TXD
0V

+24V
0V

AMP Japan
21782883(housing)
11752185 (contact)
GND

Ground for protection.

222

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

RXD
0V
0V
*RXD

CP5
(AMP)

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 Signal cable wiring

RXD

TXD

0V

0V

18

18

16

16

12

12

14

14

0V

0V

*RXD

*TXD

0V

0V

*TXD

*RXD

0V

0V

TXD

RXD

0V

0V

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010731 . . . coaxial cable (max. 50 m)
NOTE
2 Use two 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wires or thicker for the power
cable.

223

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1.7

(1) Overview

Adjusting the Flat


Display

A color liquid crystal display (LCD) and plasma display (PDP) require
settings for finely adjusting the video signal.
These settings are necessary because the signal slightly varies depending
on the NC unit or cables.
How to do the settings is described below.
Do the adjustment if the hardware of the display circuit on the NC, the
display unit, or a cable is replaced during installation or when a problem
occurs.
(2) Points to be adjusted

SW1

Color liquid crystal


display (rear side)

TM1

Power
supply

SW1 TM1

Plasma display (rear side)

(3) How to do the adjustments


(a) Adjusting any flickering
1 Color liquid crystal display: Setting pin TM1
2 Plasma display: Setting switch TM1
1) Change the setting to find a range in which there is no flickering.
2) If there are several settings without flickering, select the middle
one.
(Example) When there is no flickering in settings 2 to 6, select
setting 4.
(b) Setting the horizontal position
1 Color liquid crystal display: Setting switch SW1
2 Plasma display: Setting switch SW1
1) The horizontal position can be adjusted in units of dots.
2) Set the switch so that the entire screen is displayed. There is only
one such position. Normally, it is not necessary to change the
factory setting.
(4) Others
Do not change settings other than above such as volumes.
NOTE
The brightness of the LCD display drops in low ambient
temperatures. (The LCD screen is dark immediately after
the power is turned ON.) This is due to the characteristics
of the LCD, and is not a malfunction. The LCD screen
becomes brighter when the ambient temperature rises.

224

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1.8
Interface between
MMCIV Board and
Option 1 Board
(Video Signal)
MMCIV board

Option 1 board

JA1A
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

HIROSE
FI40A20S (connector)
FI20CV5 (case)

JA1
(PCRE20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC

Signal cable wiring

18

18

16

16

12

12

14

14

VDR

VDR

0V

0V

VDG

VDG

0V

0V

VDB

VDB

0V

0V

HSYNC

HSYNC

0V

0V

VSYNC

VSYNC

0V

0V

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010371 . . . coaxial cable (max. 40 cm)
NOTE
The MMCIV board cannot be
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

225

used

on

the

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.1.9

The keyboard interface specification is common to all MDI units exccept


9 keyboard interface.

Keyboard Interface
CNC (LCD)

B62073E/04

(Note 1)

CRT/MDI UNIT (MDI)

JA2
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

CNK1
(PCRE20MD)
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11

NOTE
1 The parenthesized modes
apply to the 10.4 LCD/MDI
unit with the internal graphics
function.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11

Cable wiring

*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09

10

10

11

11

12

12

13

13

14

14

15

15

16

16

17

17

18

18

19

19

20

20

*COM11

*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11

Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
Cable length: Up to 50 m
226

*KEY00

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1.10
Small 9 Keyboard
Interface
CNC

CRT/MDI UNIT

JA2
(PCREV20MDT)

CA9
(MR20RFD)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11

*COM11
*COM00
*COM01
*KEY06
*KEY04
*KEY02
*KEY00

8
9
10
11
12
13

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

*COM02
*COM03
*KEY07
*KEY05
*KEY03
*KEY01

*COM04
*COM05
*COM06
*COM07
*COM08
*COM09
*COM10

Cable wiring
*KEY00
*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09

14

16

18

10

20

11

13

12

12

13

11

14

10

15

16

17

15

18

17

19

19

20

*COM11

*KEY02
*KEY04
*KEY06
*COM00
*COM02
*COM04
*COM06
*COM08
*COM10
*KEY01
*KEY03
*KEY05
*KEY07
*COM01
*COM03
*COM05
*COM07
*COM09
*COM11

Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
Cable length: Up to 50 m
227

*KEY00

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.1.11
Interface between
MMCIII Board and
Option 1 Board
(Video Signal)
CNC MMCIII CPU board

CNC option 1 board

JA1
(PCREV20MDT)

JA1
(PCREV20MDT)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

VDR
0V
VDG
0V
VDB
0V

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

1
11
VDR
2
12 VSYNC
0V
3
13
VDG
4
14
0V
0V
5
15
VDB
6
16
0V
0V
7
17
8
18 HSYNC
(DTC)
9
19
10
20
Signals with marked ( ) is not used.

VSYNC
0V
0V
HSYNC

Cable wiring

18

18

16

16

12

12

14

14

VDR

VDR

0V

0V

VDG

VDG

0V

0V

VDB

VDB

0V

0V

HSYNC

HSYNC

0V

0V

VSYNC

VSYNC

0V

0V

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010371 . . . coaxial cable
NOTE
The MMCIII board cannot be
15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

228

used

on

the

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.2
I/O DEVICE
INTERFACE
7.2.1
RS232C Serial Port
RELAYING CONNECTOR

Cable wiring

Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
NOTE
For +24 V and SG, determine the wire thickness and the number of wires so that the conductor
resistance is 0.33 W or less.

229

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.2.2
PPR Connection

RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT

Relaying connector
Connector: DBM25S (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: D20418J2 (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Cable side connector
Connector: DBM25P (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: DBC2J9 (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Relayingcable

Accessory for PPR

Input power supply


AC85 to 125 V
50/60 Hz " 3 Hz 0.2 KVA

NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
3 Recommended cable specification: A66L00010041
4 When connecting the PPR, set the corresponding parameter to use reader puncher interface
(baud rate is 4800 baud).

230

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.2.3
Portable Tape Reader
Connection
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT

Relaying connector
Connector: DBM25S (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: D20418J2 (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Cable side connector
Connector: DBM25P (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: DBC2J9 (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Portable tape
reader

Relayingcable

Accessory for
portable tape reader

Cable side plug


WF7013 (Matsushita Denko)

Input power supply


AC200 to 240 V (+10%, 15%)
50/60 Hz " 1 Hz 110 VA (Without reel)
130 VA (With reel)

Plug receptable
WF3012E (Matsushita Denko)

NOTE
1 Prepare the relaying connector, the relaying cable and the plug receptacle at the machine tool
builder.
2 Prepare the power supply for PPR at the machine tool builder.
3 Recommended cable specification: A66L00010041
4 When connecting the portable tape reader, set the corresponding parameter to use reader
puncher interface (baud rate is 4800 baud).

231

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.2.4
FANUC Cassette
Connection
Cable side connector
Connector: DBM25P (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: DBC2J9 (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Relaying
cable

Accessory for cassette


Relaying connector
Connector: DBM25S (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: D20418J2 (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT

NOTE
1 Machine tool builder shall furnish relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Recommended cable specification: A66L00010041
3 Open all terminals other than illustrated.
4 Set a parameter to be able to use reader puncher interface when connecting FANUC cassette.
The standard baud rate is 4800 baud.
5 Do not use a FANUC Cassette Adapter (an external disk drive) and FANUC Handy File (an I/O
unit) at the same time. If they are connected to separate connectors, two of connectors JD5A,
JD5B, and JD5J, the power capacity may exceed that of +24 V. (When the power capacity
exceeds that of +24 V, the operation may become abnormal or the fuse for +24 V may blow.)

232

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.2.5
Connection with the
FANUC Handy File
Cable side connector
Connector: DBM25P (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: DBC2J9 (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

Relaying
cable

Accessory for cassette


Relaying connector
Connector: DBM25S (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)
Lock metal: D20418J2 (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

RELAYING CONNECTOR
SIGNAL LAYOUT

NOTE
1 The machine tool builder must provide the relay connector and relay cable.
2 Use a totally shielded cable for the signal cable.
Ordering code of recommended cable: A66L00010041
3 Open all terminals other than those illustrated.
4 Set the parameter enabling the reader/punch interface to be used when connecting a FANUC
Handy File. The standard baud rate is 4800 bauds.
5 Do not use a FANUC Cassette Adapter FANUC Handy File at the same time. If they are
connected to separate connectors, two of connectors JD5A, JD5B, and JD5J, the power
capacity may exceed that of +24 V. (When the power capacity exceeds that of +24 V, the
operation may become abnormal or the fuse for +24 V may blow.)

233

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.2.6
Connection of Tape
Reader Without Reels
Tape reader
DB25ST (Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.

Connector: DB25P
Locking: D110278
(Japan Aviation
Electronic Inc., Ltd.)

M3 screw terminal

NIHON AMP
11781283 (housing)
11752185 (contact)

Connect signal cables as shown below.


Control unit

Tape reader

Use cable lamp

NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
2 Recommended cable specification: A66L00010041
3 When CP2 and CP3 for the power supply are used for another device or unit, use the 200 VAC
voltage which is synchronized with the power on/off of the CNC power supply as the power
supply for the tape reader.

234

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.2.7
Connection of Tape
Reader with Reels
Tape reader

BurndyJapan
SMS3PK5

NIHON AMP
11781283

Connect signal cables as shown below.


Tape reader

Control unit

Use cable lamp

NOTE
1 Note that cables with the same names on the control unit and the tape reader cannot be
connected.
2 Recommended cable specification: A66L00010041
3 When CP2 and CP3 for the power supply are used for another device or unit, use the 200 VAC
voltage which is synchronized with the power on/off of the CNC power supply as the power
supply for the tape reader.

235

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.2.8
RS422 Serial Port
Host computer (example)

CNC subboard

+24 V is not used.

(1) Conceptual diagram for signal connection


The following is a conceptual diagram showing the connection of the
signals between the CNC and host.
Actually, each signal other than FG and SG requires two lines because
the signals are transmitted in differential signal transmission in the
RS422 standard.
CNC
Output
Input

Host

236

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(2) Example of actual connection of RS422 cables

(Note 2)

Shield
Ground plate

NOTE
1 Use twistedpair cables.
2 Note that the pin position for the *DM signal is irregular on the CNC side (to prevent erroneous
connection).

237

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.3
MANUAL PULSE
GENERATOR
INTERFACE
MPG
MPG UNIT #1
(M3 screw terminal)

MPG UNIT #2
(M3 screw terminal)

MPG UNIT #3
(M3 screw terminal)

CABLE WIRING

Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pair)
FOR Lv 20 m

238

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(1) Cable connection for the manual pulse generator


The power supply to the manual pulse generator is 5 VDC, same as for
the pulse coder. It is therefore necessary to prevent cable resistance
from causing the supply voltage to drop more than 0.2 V (total for both
the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.1: 0.1 A power supply current of the
0.2 u+ 0.1 R 2L
m
manual pulse generator
R: Resistance per unit length of the
This can be converted to the
wire (W/m)
following equation:
m: Number of wires connected in
L t+ m
each 0 V and 5 V line
R
L: Wire length (m)
When A66L00010286 cable is used:
This cable, developed for the FS15B/16/18 pulse coder interface,
consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When three wires of this cable are used for 0
V and another three for 5 V, the allowable cable length is calculated
as follows:
3 + 76.75 [m]
L t+
0.0394
This means that a power supply with a cable length of 50 m is still
within specifications.

239

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.4
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE
(RS232C)
Host computer (example)

CNC OPTION1 Board

Conceptional diagram of signal connection


CNC side
Output
Input

Host side

240

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Example of cabling

Shield
Ground plate

Connect CS to RS if CS is not used. However, when protocol A or


expanded protocol A is used, connect as shown above because CS is used
for busy control. Connect DR to ER when DR is not used. Be sure to
connect CD to ER.

241

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.5
REMOTE BUFFER
INTERFACE (RS422)
Host computer (example)

CNC OPTION1 Board

(+24 V) is not used.

(1) Conceptional diagram of signal connection


The figure below shows a signal connection between CNC and a host
computer. Since signals other than FG and SG perform differential
signal transmission, two wires of signal lines are used for those
signals.

CNC side
Output
Input

Host side

242

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(2) Actual example of RS422 signal wiring

(Note 2)

Shield
Ground plate

NOTE
1 Be sure to use twisted pair cable.
2 Note that the pin position of the *DM signal on the CNC side is positioned irregularly relative
to the other signals. This is to reduce the risk of damage to the circuit when this connector is
erroneously connected to the connector on the other side.

243

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.6

B62073E/04

Connection for highspeed skip signals is as follows:

HIGHSPEED DI
SIGNAL INTERFACE

244

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Cable connection

Shield
Ground plate

Shield
Ground plate

Description
Highspeed skip signals (HSKP1 to HSKP4) or
highspeed measured positionreached signals
(HEA1 to HEA3)

15M
15T

HDI0 = HSKP1 or HEA1


HDI1 = HSKP2 or HEA2
HDI2 = HSKP3 or HEA3
HDI3 = HSKP4
Highspeed skip signals (HSKP1 to HSKP3) or
highspeed measured positionreached signals
(HEA1 to HEA3)
HDI0 = HSKP1 or HEA1 on tool post 1
HDI1 = HSKP2 or HEA2 on tool post 1
HDI2 = HSKP3 or HEA3 on tool post 1

151T

HDI4 = HSKP1 or HEA1 on tool post 2


HDI5 = HSKP2 or HEA2 on tool post 2
HDI6 = HSKP3 or HEA3 on tool post 2

NOTE
Unused pins of the connectors must be left open.

245

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Highspeed DI Signal Receiver Input Signal Standard


Circuit configuration

Driver

NC

Receiver

VH/VL

Iih/Iil

Shield

Absolute maximum rating


Input voltage range Vin: 3.6 V to +13.6 V
Input characteristics
Item

Symbol

Standard

Unit

Highlevel input voltage

VH

3.6 to 11.6

Lowlevel input voltage

VL

0 to 1.0

0.5 max.

mA

High level input current


Highlevel

Iih

Vin=5 V

9.3 max.

mA

Vin=10 V

8.0 max.

mA

Vin=0 V

Lowlevel input current

Iil

Description

NOTE
1 Symbols lih and lil shows the signal flow direction, + signals
flow into the receiver, and signals flow out of the receiver.
2 When the input voltage is low level, highspeed skip signals
are regarded as logic 1, and when the input voltage is high
level, the signals are regarded as logic 0.

246

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.7
CONNECTION OF
REFERENCE
POSITION
APPROACH SIGNAL

Connect the reference position approach signal as shown below. This


signal is used when using the grid method (only for CNCs for multiaxis
machines).
For information regarding connections and sequences for reference
position return, refer to the BMI Interface Connection Manual. The
following text describes only the connection of the reference position
approach signal.
CNC (Additional cabinet)

Cable wiring

Shield
Ground plate

Signal name

Description

NZ1

1staxis reference position approach signal

NZ2

2ndaxis reference position approach signal

NZ3

3rdaxis reference position approach signal

NZ4

4thaxis reference position approach signal

NZ1

5thaxis reference position approach signal

NZ2

6thaxis reference position approach signal

NZ3

7thaxis reference position approach signal

NZ4

8thaxis reference position approach signal

Axis CPU1

Axis CPU2

247

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.8
DNC INTERFACE
7.8.1
DNC1 Interface

a. Multipoint connection
CNC OPTION1 board

Tap

JD6A
(PCREV20MDT)
1

TRD1(+)

11

TRD2(+)

TRD2(+)

TRD1()

12

TRD2()

TRD2()

13

14

15

16

17

SG

14

15

9
10

TRD1(+)

11

TRD1()

12
SG

16
17
18
19

13

20

18

19

10

20

Cable connection
1

10

11

11

12

TRD1 (+)

TRD1 (+)

TRD1 ()

TRD1 ()

TRD2 (+)

TRD2 (+)

TRD2 ()

TRD2 ()

SG

SG

PCR connector

248

MR connector
(MR20 female)

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

b. 11 connection
CNC OPTION1 board

Tap

JD6A
(PCREV20MDT)
1

RD

11

SD

SD

*RD

12

*SD

*SD

RT

13

TT

TR

*RT

14

*TT

*TR

CS

15

RS

RS

*CS

16

*RS

*RS

DM

17

TR

SG

SG

18

*TR

*DM

19

10

TT

*TT

10

RD

11

*RD

12

DM

13

*DM

14

CS

15

*CS

16
17
18

RT

19

*RT

20

20

Cable connection
11

12

10

11

13

14

18

19

15

16

14

15

12

13

17

18

SD

SD

*SD

*SD

RD

RD

*RD

*RD

TT

TT

*TT

*TT

RT

RT

*RT

*RT

RS

RS

*RS

*RS

CS

CS

*CS

*CS

DM

DM

*DM

*DM

TR

TR

*TR

*TR

SG

SG
Twisted shielded cable
0.3 mm2 wire or thicker
HONDA Tsushin MR20 (female)

249

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.8.2
DNC2 Interface
(RS232C)

CNC OPTION1 board

Host computer (example)

JD5C
(PCREV20MDT)

DBM25S

RD

11

SD

FG

0V

12

0V

SD

DR

13

ER

RD

0V

14

0V

RS

CS

15

RS

CS

0V

16

0V

DR

CO

17

SG

0V

18

CD

9
10

19
(+24V)

(+24V)

20

14
15
16
17
18
19
20

ER

21
22

10

23

11

24

12

25

13

Conceptual diagram of
signal connection
CNC
Output
Input

Host

0V

SD

SD

RD

RD

RS

RS

CS

CS

ER

ER

DR

DR

CD

CD

SG

SG

FG

FG

FRAME

When CS is not used, short with RS.


When DR is not used, short with ER.
CD must be shorted with ER at all times.
NOTE
When an IBM PCAT is used, RS becomes low in the
reception phase. When this happens, short CS on the host
with ER on the host.

250

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.8.3
DNC2 Interface
(RS422)

CNC OPTION1 board

Host computer (example)

JD6A
(PCREV20MDT)

FG

21

RD

11

SD

*RD

12

*SD

RT

13

TT

*RT

14

*TT

RD

CS

15

RS

RS

*CS

16

*RS

RT

DM

17

TR

CS

0V

18

*TR

10

*DM

19

(+24V)

11

DM

10

(+24V)

20

12

TR

SD

13

TT

18
SG

Conceptual diagram of
signal connection
CNC
Output
Input

Host

0V

SD

SD

RD

RD

RS

RS

CS

CS

TR

TR

DM

DM

TT

TT

RT

RT

SG

SG

FG

FG

FRAME

251

24

*RD

25

*RS

26

*RT

27

*CS

28
29

*DM

30

*TR

31

34

16

19

*SD

23

33

15
17

22

32

14

(+24 V) is not used.

20

35
36
37

*TT

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.9
SPINDLE INTERFACE

B62073E/04

The following two configurations of the spindle interface are available in


Series 15B.
(1) Series Serial spindle

P/C
1st spindle

Serial

SPDL1 (JA7A)

JA7B

spindle

JA7A

amplifier

Motor

Main CPU
board

P/C
2nd spindle

Serial
JA7B

spindle

JA7A

amplifier

Motor

(2) Analog spindle

Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase)


SPDL1 (JA7A)
P/C
Analog signal
AOUT1 (JA8A)

SPDL2 (JA7B)

1st spindle
Analog spindle
amplifier

Motor

Position coder return signal (A/B/Z phase)


P/C

AOUT2 (JA8B)

Analog signal

Analog spindle
amplifier

2nd spindle

Motor

The position coder return signal for the 1st spindle is connected to
connector JA7A used for connecting the serial spindle described in (1)
above.
NOTE
Only the 1st analog spindle can be connected for the Series
15MB and 15TB. The 1st and 2nd analog spindles can
be connected only for Series 15TTB.

252

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Spindle Motor Safety Measure


To ensure a high degree of safety in the event of a malfunction, adopt a
safety measure such as that shown below capable of stopping spindle
rotation if a speed higher than the specified spindle speed is detected.

WARNING

CNC

Spindle speed
detection

Actual spindle speed


signal
AR0 to AR15
PMC

Greater
than
specified
value?

P/C

Spindle amplifier

Spindle

SP motor

MCC

200 VAC input

Example of safety circuit when analog spindle I/F interface is used

The speed of rotation input to the CNC from the position coder is read by
the PMC. If this speed of rotation exceeds the preset spindle speed, the
MCC for the spindle amplifier is shut OFF by the PMC.

253

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

7.9.1
Serial Spindle Interface
(S Series Spindle)

B62073E/04

Connect to the spindle amplifier, using optical fiber cable equipped with
an optical I/O link adaptor.

I/O LINK ADAPTER


Spindle
amplifier

Up to 2 m

Optical
fiber
cable

CABLE WIRING

Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
254

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

See section 6.2.2 for adapter and optical fiber cable specifications.
Pay attention to the following points when you are using the panel internal
wiring type without reinforced covering (A66L60010008).

D
D
D

Do not to bend optical fiber cable to less than a radius of 15 mm.


Do not unnecessarily twist optical fiber cable.
When securing optical fiber cable using nylon bands, do not allow the
outer covering of the cable to be deformed. (Do not tug on nylon bands.
Tugging on nylon bands applies unnecessary force on the optical fiber
cable.)
When securing optical fiber cable using nylon bands, do not allow
bending force to be applied partially.

7.9.2
Serial Spindle Interface
( Series)
CNC

series spindle amplifier module

JA7A (main CPU board)


(PCREV20MDT)

JA7B
(PCREV20MDT)

SIN

11

*SIN

12

SOUT

13

*SOUT

14

15

16

17

8
9

18
(+5V)

10

0V
0V

0V
(+5V)

SIN

11

0V

*SIN

12

0V

SOUT

13

0V

*SOUT

14

0V

15

0V

16

0V

17

19
20

9
(+5V)

18
(+5V)

10

20

JA7B

JA7A

*SOUT
SIN
*SIN

0V

0V

0V

(+5V)

series spindle amplifier module

CNC

SOUT

(+5V)

19

12

12

14

14

16

16

Shield

255

Ground plate

SIN
*SIN
SOUT
*SOUT

0V

0V

0V

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 Recommended cable specification: A66L00010248#10P (#28AWG x 10 pairs)
2 When this cable is wired closely to power cables or other cables, shielded leads must be
grounded to the grounding plate. This is unnecessary when the CNC is mounted close to the
spindle amplifier module.
3 When the CNC and spindle amplifier module are located in the same magnetics box or
magnetics box welded together, connection by electrical signal leads from this case is
necessary. When the CNC and spindle motor are mounted separately in two or more
magnetics boxes that are not welded together, they must be connected by optical fiber cable
using the optical I/O link adapter.
4 The +5 V terminal is for optical link transfer via the optical I/O link adapter. When connecting
by a metal cable such as this cable, leave the +5 V terminal unconnected. When the +5 V
terminal is connected by mistake, short both the +5 V terminals on the NC unit and the spindle
modular.

7.9.3
Analog Spindle
Interface

Signal name

Description

SVC, ES

Spindle command voltage and common


line

ENB1, ENB2

Spindle enable signal (Note 1)

CLKX0, CLKX1
FSX0, FSX1
DX0, DX1
" 15 V, ) 5 V, 0 V

Feed axis check signal (Note 2)

CABLE WIRING

Shield
Ground plate

256

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 ENB1 and 2 turn on when a spindle command voltage is effective. These signals are not used
when the FANUC Spindle Servo Unit is used.
2 Feed axis check signal is used when a feed axis is checked or service work is done. This signal
is not used for spindle control.

7.9.4
Pulse Coder Interface

Signal name

Description

SC, *SC

Pulse coder Cphase signal

PA, *PA

Pulse coder Aphase signal

PB, *PB

Pulse coder Bphase signal

SOUT, *SOUT

Signal for serial spindle (Note 1)

POSITION CODER

Shield
Earthplate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010286 (#20AWG6+#24AWG3) max length 20 m.

257

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 Signals SPOUT and *SPOUT are for a serial spindle. These
signals are not used for an analog spindle.
2 When the line length is over 14 m, set the maximum
electrical resistance of 0 V and 5 V to 0.5 W.

The position coder, which generates square waveform voltage signals of


the number proportionate to the angle of rotation of the spindle, is used
for perrevolution feed and for thread cutting. The spindle and the
position coder are connected in the following four ways by parameter
setting (parameter 5610).
(1) One revolution of the position coder for one revolution of the spindle.
(2) One revolution of the position coder for two revolution of the spindle.
(3) One revolution of the position coder for four revolution of the spindle.
(4) One revolution of the position coder for eight revolution of the spindle.
Fig. 7.9.4 shows the timing chart of signals generated from the position
coder.

PA
1024 pulse/revolution

PB
1024 pulse/revolution

SC
1 pulse/revolution

Fig. 7.9.4 Waveform generated by position coder

NOTE
A differential driver is used for feedback from the position
coder.
*PA, *PB, and *SC are the inverted signals of PA, PB, and
SC respectively and vice sersa.

258

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.10
SERVO INTERFACE
7.10.1

The servo interface of the Series 15B has these features.

Outline

Digital control AC servo motor


Motor feedback : Serial pulse coder
1) 10,000 pulse/rev incremental pulse coder
2) 1,000,000 pulse/rev absolute pulse coder
Scale feedback : A/B/Z signal interface

SEPARATE TYPE
DISCHARGE UNIT

T2 T4

MAIN CPU BOARD


OPTION2 BOARD

AC 200 V
T1
JVn

JFn

JA4A, JA4B

AC 100 V

CN1
200 VAC INPUT
DIGITAL SERVO
AMPLIFIER
MS3106B2214S

+6 V BATTERY UNIT
FOR ABSOLUTE
PULSE CODER

JF2n

LINEAR SCALE

n=AXIS NUMBER
(1, 2, .. 8)

For details, refer to FANUC AC SERVO MOTOR


DESCRIPTIONS (B65002E)

259

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(1) For the series servo amplifier

7.10.2
Servo Amp Interface

JV1 to JV8
(PCREV20MDT)

n: Axis number
(1 to 8)
CABLE WIRING

Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)

260

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(2) For the Sseries servo amplifier

JV1 to JV8
(PCREV20MDT)

n: Axis number (1 to 8)

CABLE WIRING

Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)

261

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(3) For the Cseries servo amplifier

JV1 to JV8
(PCREV20MDT)

n: Axis number
(1 to 8)
CABLE WIRING

Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)

262

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.10.3

(1) For the serial pulse coder A, B

Serial Pulse Coder


Interface
SERVO MOTOR
JF1 to JF8
(PCREV20MDT)

PULSE CODER

CABLE WIRING

Shield

SHLD (shield)

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pair)

263

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(2) For the serial pulse coder C (model 0S or more)

SERVO MOTOR
JF1 to JF8
(PCREV20MDT)

PULSE CODER

MS3106B2029SW(straight)
MS3108B2029SW (elbow)

CABLE WIRING

Shield

SHLD (shield)

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pair)

264

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(3) For the model 40S to 00SP (common for incremental and absolute)
SERVO MOTOR
PULSE CODER

JF1 to JF8
(PCREV20MDT)

Connector HDAB15S
Connector cover HDAW15CV (20SP to 00SP)
Connector cover HDACTH (40S, 30S)

CABLE WIRING

Shield

SHLD (shield)

Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pair)

265

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(1) Cable connection for the incremental pulse coder


Series 15B employ a serial pulse coder for which the power supply
is 5 VDC, same as used by the conventional pulse coder. It is necessary
to suppless the cable resistance used for the power supply to 0.5 V or
less (total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
R: Resistance per unit length of the
0.5 u+ R 2L
m
wire (W/m)
m: Number of wires connected in each
This can be converted to the
0 V and 5 V line
following equation:
L: Wire length (m)
L t+ m
4R
(a) When A66L00010286 cable is used:
This cable, developed for the Series 15B/16/18 pulse coder interface,
consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When this cable is used, the maximum cable
length is calculated as follows:
3
+ 19 [m]
L t+
4 0.0394
This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with the
Series 15B/16/18 and 18 connector. However it cannot be extended
up to 50 m.
(b) When A66L00010157 cable is used:
This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B61393)
for Series 0, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power line
wires (50/0.18, 0.016 W/m).
When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as
follows:
3
+ 46.87 [m]
L t+
4 0.016
This cable can be extended up to 46 m from an electrical point of view.
However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securely
into f cable clamp for Series 15B cable.
It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal
block or peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce
the diameter so that it fits into the connector.
Example 1)
For example, MR connector manufactured by Honda Communications
Pulse corder
Terminal
block

266

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Example 2)
Pulse corder

Enlarged figure

Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with


a heat shrinkable tube

(2) Cable connection for the absolute pulse coder


Series 15B employ the serial pulse coder, for which the power supply
5 VDC, same as for the conventional pulse coder. It is necessary to
suppless the cable resistance used for the power supply to 0.5 V or less
(total for both the 0 V and 5 V lines).
This is written as:
0.5 u+ R

2L
m

This can be converted to the


following equation:

R: Resistance per unit length of the


wire (W/m)
m: Number of wires connected in each
0 V and 5 V line
L: Wire length (m)

m
4R
(a) When A66L00010286 cable is used:
This cable, developed for the Series 15B/16/18 pulse coder interface,
consists of three pairs of signal wires and six power line wires
(20/0.18, 0.0394 W/m). When this cable is used, the maximum cable
length is calculated as follows:
L t+

3
+ 19 [m]
4 0.0394
This cable has a diameter of 8.5 mm and is suitable for use with the
connector for Series 16 and 18 but cannot be extended up to 50 m.
L t+

(b) When A66L00010157 cable is used:


This cable, specified as cable C in the connection manual (B61393)
for Series 0, consists of five pairs of signal wires and six power line
wires (50/0.18, 0.016 W/m).
When this cable is used, the maximum cable length is calculated as
follows:
L t+

3
+ 46.87 [m]
0.016

This cable can be extended up to 46 m from an electrical point of view.


However, because of its 11 mm diameter, it does not fit very securely into
the cable clamp for Series 15B.
It is therefore necessary to use a larger size connector at a terminal block or
peel off the insulation sheath at the end of the cable to reduce the diameter
so that it fits into the connector.
267

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Example 1)
For example, MR connector manufactured by Honda Communications
Pulse corder
Terminal
block

Example 2)
Pulse corder

Enlarged figure

Peel off the insulation sheath and cover with a heat shrinkable tube

268

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.10.4
Linear Scale Interface
(A/B/Z Signal Interface)
LINEAR SCALE
JF21 to JF28
(PCREV20MDT)

+6 V and REQ are for separate absolute pulse coders.

CABLE WIRING

Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24WG 3pair)

269

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Input Signal Standard


The standard for the feedback signal from the linear scale is as follows.
(1) A, B phase signal input
The position of the linear scale is detected by inputting position
information by the A and B phase signals whose phases are mutually
displayed by 90. The B phase signal ahead of the A phase signal is
interpreted as a movement of the linear scale in the plus direction,
while the A phase signal ahead of the B phase signal is interpreted as
a movement of the linear scale in the minus direction.

Move to + direction

A phase signal
B phase signal

Move to direction

A phase signal
B phase signal

(2) Phase difference and minimum repeat cycle Tdy 0.15 msec (0.21 msec
when servo software 906X is used)

PCA/*PCA

0.5V

*PCA/PCA

PCB/*PCB

0.5V
*PCB/PCB

Td

Td

Td

Td

Tp

(3) Z phase signal input


A signal width of 1/4 cycle or more of the A and B phase signals is
required for Z phase signal input (single rotation signal).
Z phase signal

Tw

Twy 1/4 cycle of A phase or B phase

270

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.10.5
Linear Scale Interface
(Serial Interface)

CNC

Linear scale (serial interface)

JF21 to JF28
(PCREV20MDT)
1

SD

11

*SD

12

13

14

REQ

15

*REQ

16

(+6V)

17

8
9
10

18
+5V

0V

0V

0V

+6 V is for separate absolute pulse coders.

+5V

19
20

+5V

CABLE WIRING

SD
*SD

REQ
*REQ

+5V
+5V
+5V
0V
0V
0V

SD

*SD

REQ

*REQ

+5V

18

+5V

20

+5V

12

0V

14

0V

16

0V
Shield
Ground plate

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A66L00010286 (#20AWG 6 + #24AWG 3pairs)

271

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.10.6
APC Battery Interface
Batterycase

CABLE WIRING
Batterycase

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


y 0.2 mm2 (7/0.18)
NOTE
The service life of the APC battery is about one year per
fourcell battery case when used for backup of six axes
(serial pulse coder A).

272

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.10.7

The hybrid control system requires an auxiliary position detecting device


in addition to the position detector used in conventional servo systems.
This auxiliary position detecting device is called the separate detector.
For hybrid control, the pulse detector can be used as the separate detector
(linear scale such as an optical scale or Magnescale). The separate
detector connectors (JF21 to JF28) of the CNC are the same as those of
the linear scale interface (see 7.10.4).

Hybridcontrol
Connections

CNC

Linear scale
Position
command

JVn
Digital
servo
amp.

Hybride
control

AC
servo
motor

Build in
pulse
coder

JFn

JF2n

n: Axis number = 1, 2, 3 ...

273

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.11
GENERALPURPOSE
ANALOG VOLTAGE
INPUT INTERFACE

CNC

Analog voltage input range: 10 V to +10 V


Input current: " 0.5 mA max.

JA6
(PCREV20MDT)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

AIN0
0V
AIN2
0V
(0V)

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

AIN1
0V
AIN3
0V
(0V)

NOTE
Signals enclosed in parentheses cannot be used.
Unused pins must be left open.
Connect the signal cables as follows:
Control unit

+5V
R R
AIN0 1
0V 2
R

LM1
0M1

+5V
R

2nd analog spindle unit

R AIN1 11
R
0V 12

+5V
R

1st analog spindle unit

R AIN2 3
0V 4

1st general
purpose analog
input signal

+5V
R

R AIN3 13
R
0V 14

2nd general
purpose analog
input signal

Clamp the cables


with a cable clamp.

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL:


A66L00010284#10P (#28AWG 10pair)
274

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.12
CONNECTION
BETWEEN THE
SERIES 15B
(MMCII) AND
PERIPHERAL UNITS
Control unit
MMCII MAIN CPU
JD5A to JD5B: PCR20

Punch panel (RS232C)


CD6A to CD6B: DBM25S

JD5A
to
JD5B
JD6
(Note 3)

CD6A
to
CD6B

NOTE
1 The above diagram shows the connection with the punch panel (connector for an extension
cable). For connection with external devices, prepare cables for direct connection, if necessary.
2 The +24 V terminal in the above diagram is used exclusively for the FANUC I/O devices. Do
not use it for other purposes.
When a FANUC I/O device that utilizes +24 V is connected to Series 15B, do not connect more
than one device at one time due to the limitation of the power supply.
3 For the MMC CPU (A02B0120J201), which requires two RS232C channels and one
RS422 channel, JD6 is used as an RS422 port. Therefore, it cannot be used as an RS232C
interface.
4 The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

275

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Punch panel

MMCII MAIN CPU

(RS232C)
JD5A to JD5B 11

SD

JD5A to JD5B 12

0V

JD5A to JD5B 01

RD

JD5A to JD5B 02

0V

JD5A to JD5B 15

RS

JD5A to JD5B 16

0V

JD5A to JD5B 05

CS

JD5A to JD5B 06

0V

JD5A to JD5B 03

DR

JD5A to JD5B 04

0V

JD5A to JD5B 07

CD

JD5A to JD5B 08

0V

JD5A to JD5B 13

ER

JD5A to JD5B 14

0V

JD5A to JD5B 10

JD5A to JD5B 19

SD

CD6A to CD6B 02

RD

CD6A to CD6B 03

RS

CD6A to CD6B 04

CS

CD6A to CD6B 05

DR

CD6A to CD6B 06

CD

CD6A to CD6B 08

ER

CD6A to CD6B 20

SG

CD6A to CD6B 07

+24V

CD6A to CD6B 25

+24V

+24V

FG

CD6A to CD6B 01

NOTE
1 The cable shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units
in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable clamp.
Recommended cable: A66L00010284#10P
2 The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

276

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.13
CONNECTION WITH
AN EXTERNAL
DEVICE USING THE
RS422 INTERFACE
FOR SERIES 15B
(MMCII)
Control unit
MMCII MAIN CPU
JD6: PCR20

External device (RS422)

NOTE
1 In the above diagram, the interface for the external device is an example. The cable to be
actually used shall be designed according to the interface for external device.
2 Do not connect anything to the (+24 V) terminal.
3 For the MMCII CPU (A02B0120J202), which requires three RS232C channels, JD6 is
used as an RS232C port. Therefore, it cannot be used as an RS422 interface.
4 The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

277

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

I/O (RS422)

MMCII MAIN CPU

JD6 11

SD

RD

06

JD6 12

*SD

*RD

24

JD6 01

RD

SD

04

JD6 02

*RD

*SD

22

JD6 15

RS

CS

09

JD6 16

*RS

*CS

27

JD6 05

CS

RS

07

JD6 06

*CS

*RS

25

JD6 07

DR

ER

12

JD6 09

*DR

*ER

30

JD6 17

ER

DR

11

JD6 18

*ER

*DR

29

JD6 13

TT

RT

08

JD6 14

*TT

*RT

26

JD6 03

RT

TT

17

JD6 04

*RT

*TT

35

JD6 08

0V

SG

19

JD6 10

(+24V)

JD6 19

(+24V)

FG

01

NOTE
The cable shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker.
Connect the units in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable
clamp.
Recommended cable: A66L00010284#10P

278

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.14
CONNECTION WITH
A PRINTER USING
THE CENTRONICS
INTERFACE FOR
FANUC SERIES 15B
(MMCII)

Control unit
MMCII MAIN CPU
JD9: PCR20

Printer (Centronics)

NOTE
1 In the above diagram, the interface for the external device is an example. The cable to be
actually used shall be designed according to the interface for the applicable external device.
2 The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

279

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Printer (Centronics)

MMCII MAIN CPU

JD9 01

STD0

JD9 02

STD1

JD9 03

STD2

JD9 04

STD3

JD9 12

0V

JD9 05

STD4

JD9 06

STD5

JD9 07

STD6

JD9 08

STD7

JD9 14

0V

JD9 09

PE

JD9 11

*STB

JD9 10

SLCT

JD9 13

*AFD

JD9 16

0V

JD9 15

*INIT

JD9 20

BUSY

JD9 17

*SLIN

JD9 19

*ERROR

JD9 18

0V

STD0
0V
STD1
0V
STD2
0V
STD3
0V

02
20
03
21
04
22
05
23

STD4
0V
STD5
0V
STD6
0V
STD7
0V

06
24
07
25
08
26
09
27

PE
0V
*STB
0V
SLCT

12
30
01
19
13
14
16

*AFD
0V

*INIT
0V
BUSY
0V
*SLIN

31
28
11
29
36

*ERROR
0V

32
33

FG

17

NOTE
The cable shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units
in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable clamp.
Recommended cable: A66L00010285#25P

280

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.15
CONNECTION WITH
AN EXTENSION
ADAPTOR UNIT FOR
FANUC SERIES 15B
(MMCII)
Extension adapter unit

Control unit
MAIN CPU (01P3C)
JD5C: PCR20

JD5: PCR20

(Note 1)

To keyboard

M4 screw terminal

NOTE
1 It is not necessary to prepare the cable, because it is attached to the keyboard.
2 The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

281

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(1) Connection for signal wire

MAIN CPU

JD5C 11
JD5C 12
JD5C 01
JD5C 02
JD5C 05
JD5C 04
JD5C 13
JD5C 14

D5C 10
D5C 19
D5C 06
D5C 08
D5C 16

Extension adapter

SDK

SDK

0V

0V

RDK

RDK

0V

0V

CSK

CSK

0V

0V

ERK

ERK

0V

0V

+24V

+24V

+24V

+24V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

0V

JD5 11
JD5 12
JD5 01
JD5 02
JD5 05
JD5 04
JD5 13
JD5 14

JD5 10
JD5 19
JD5 06
JD5 08
JD5 16

NOTE
The cable shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker. Connect the units
in accordance with the above diagram, and fasten the shield with a cable clamp.
Recommended cable: A66L00010284#10P.
(2) Connection with the cable

Extension adapter

NOTE
The cable shall be 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) or thicker. Ground
the cable.

282

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.16
CONNECTION WITH
A HARD DISK UNIT
FOR FANUC SERIES
15B (MMCII)
Hard disk unit

Control unit
MMCII MAIN CPU (01P3C)
JD7: PCR50

JD7: PCR50

Power supply unit

NOTE
The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

283

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Hard disk unit

CassetteStreamerunit

JD7B: PCR50

JD7A: PCR50

284

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(1) Connection for signal wire


MAIN CPU
(Hard disk unit)

Hard Disk Unit


(Cassette streamer unit)

JD7 26
JD7 01
JD7 27
JD7 02
JD7 28
JD7 03
JD7 29
JD7 04
JD7 30

*DB0
0V
*DB1
0V
*DB2
0V
*DB3
0V
*DB4

JD7 05
JD7 31
JD7 06
JD7 32
JD7 07
JD7 33
JD7 08
JD7 34
JD7 09
JD7 38
JD7 39
JD7 41
JD7 16
JD7 43
JD7 18
JD7 44
JD7 19
JD7 45
JD7 20
JD7 46
JD7 21
JD7 47
JD7 22
JD7 48
JD7 23
JD7 49

0V
*DB5
0V
*DB6
0V
*DB7
0V
*DBP
0V
*TERMPWR
0V
*ATN
0V
*BSY
0V
*ACK
0V
*RST
0V
*MSG
0V
*SEL
0V
*C/D
0V
*REQ

JD7 24
JD7 50
JD7 25
JD7 35
JD7 10
JD7 36
JD7 11
JD7 37
JD7 12
JD7 40
JD7 15
JD7 42
JD7 17
JD7 14
JD7 13

0V
*I/O
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

285

*DB0
0V
*DB1
0V
*DB2
0V
*DB3
0V
*DB4

JD7 26
JD7 01
JD7 27
JD7 02
JD7 28
JD7 03
JD7 29
JD7 04
JD7 30

0V
*DB5
0V
*DB6
0V
*DB7
0V
*DBP
0V
*TERMPWR
0V
*ATN
0V
*BSY
0V
*ACK
0V
*RST
0V
*MSG
0V
*SEL
0V
*C/D
0V
*REQ

JD7 05
JD7 31
JD7 06
JD7 32
JD7 07
JD7 33
JD7 08
JD7 34
JD7 09
JD7 38
JD7 39
JD7 41
JD7 16
JD7 43
JD7 18
JD7 44
JD7 19
JD7 45
JD7 20
JD7 46
JD7 21
JD7 47
JD7 22
JD7 48
JD7 23
JD7 49

0V
*I/O
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V

JD7 24
JD7 50
JD7 25
JD7 35
JD7 10
JD7 36
JD7 11
JD7 37
JD7 12
JD7 40
JD7 15
JD7 42
JD7 17
JD7 14
JD7 13

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 Use a shielded cable containing 25 pairs of AWG28 wires,
with a characteristic impedance of 100 to 130 ohms.
Recommended cable material: A66L00010319#25P
2 For noise protection, thread the shielded cable through
ferrite cores as shown below and connect the shield to the
frame ground at both ends.

Connector

Connector
Ferrite core

Ferrite core
Cable

f
FG

f
FG

NOTE
3 Ensure that the total signal cable length (J11M + J66M)
does not exceed 6 m.
(2) Power connection

CP3 1

PW1 1

CP3 2

PW1 2

CP3 3

PW1 3

NOTE
Use a 30/0.18 (0.75 mm2) wire or thicker for the power
cable.

286

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.17

Connection with portable 5.25 and portable 3.5 floppy disk unit

CONNECTION WITH
A FLOPPY DISK UNIT
FOR FANUC SERIES
15B (MMCII)
Control unit

Portable floppy disk unit

MMCII MAIN CPU (01P3C)


JD8: PCR50

JD8: PCR50

NOTE
The MMCII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

287

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(1) Connection for signal wire


MAIN CPU
JD8 07
JD8 08
JD8 38
JD8 39
JD8 09
JD8 10
JD8 36
JD8 37
JD8 17
JD8 18
JD8 40
JD8 41
JD8 26
JD8 27
JD8 34
JD8 35
JD8 28
JD8 29
JD8 32
JD8 33
JD8 15
JD8 16
JD8 30
JD8 31
JD8 13
JD8 14
JD8 03
JD8 04
JD8 05
JD8 06
JD8 11
JD8 12
JD8 01
JD8 02
JD8 19
JD8 20
JD8 42
JD8 43
JD8 44
JD8 45
JD8 46
JD8 47
JD8 21
JD8 22
JD8 23
JD8 48

*MON
0V
*MODE
0V
*DS0
0V
*DS1
0V
*DS2
0V
*DS3
0V
*SIDE
0V
*HDLD
0V
*TRK0
0V
*INDEX
0V
*DIR
0V
*STEP
0V
*WE
0V
*WPRT
0V
*WDATA
0V
*RDATA
0V
*READY
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V

*MON
0V
*MODE
0V
*DS0
0V
*DS1
0V
*DS2
0V
*DS3
0V
*SIDE
0V
*HDLD
0V
*TRK0
0V
*INDEX
0V
*DIR
0V
*STEP
0V
*WE
0V
*WPRT
0V
*WDATA
0V
*RDATA
0V
*READY
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V

288

Portable
FDD Unit
JD8 07
JD8 08
JD8 38
JD8 39
JD8 09
JD8 10
JD8 36
JD8 37
JD8 17
JD8 18
JD8 40
JD8 41
JD8 26
JD8 27
JD8 34
JD8 35
JD8 28
JD8 29
JD8 32
JD8 33
JD8 15
JD8 16
JD8 30
JD8 31
JD8 13
JD8 14
JD8 03
JD8 04
JD8 05
JD8 06
JD8 11
JD8 12
JD8 01
JD8 02
JD8 19
JD8 20
JD8 42
JD8 43
JD8 44
JD8 45
JD8 46
JD8 47
JD8 21
JD8 22
JD8 23
JD8 48

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

NOTE
1 The cable for J12M shall be shielded twistedpair cable, 7/0.127 (0.09 mm2) or thicker.
Connect the units in accordance with the diagram on the previous page, and fasten the shield
with a cable clamp.
Recommended cable: A66L00010285#25P
2 The cable must not be more than 2 m long.
(2) Connection with the cable

Portable 5.25
FDD Unit

AC100V to
AC240V

PW1 1

PW1 2

PW1 3

NOTE
The cable shall be 20/0.18 (0.5 mm2) or thicker.

289

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.18
RS232C SERIAL
PORT (MMCIII)
Host Computer (Example)

MMCIII CPU Board


JD5F to JD5H
(PCREV20MDT)

The signal marked with ( )


connect to FANUC I/O device side.

Signal connection
(1) When the terminals (CS, DR, CD) can not be used.
MMCIII CPU Board

Host
SD

SD

RD

RD

RS
CS
ER
DR
CD

RS
CS
ER
DR
CD

(SIGNAL GROUND)

SG

SG

(FRAME GROUND)

FG

FG

290

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

(2) When all signals can be used.


MMCIII CPU Board

Modem
SD

SD

RD

RD

RS

RS

CS

CS

ER

ER

DR

DR

CD

CD

(SIGNAL GROUND)

SG

SG

(FRAME GROUND)

FG

FG

NOTE
The MMCIII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

291

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

7.19
OUTER HARD DISK
INTERFACE
(MMCIII)
Minislot
Outer Hard Disk Interface Board

RECOMMENDED CABLE MATERIAL


A02B0161K800 Cable for Data transmission or
Cable attached with external hard disk.
POKEDY 2.5 A87L00010135
Refer to the wiring diagram on the next page.
NOTE
The MMCIII board cannot be used on the 15TED/15TEE/15TEF/15MEK/15MEL.

292

7. CONNECTION TO CNC PERIPHERALS

B62073E/04

Cable Wiring

*D0
0V
*D1
0V
*D2
0V
*D3
0V
*D4
0V
*D5
0V
*D6
0V
*D7
0V
*DP
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
*ATN
0V
0V
0V
*BSY
0V
*ACK
0V
*RST
0V
*MSG
0V
*SEL
0V
*CD
0V
*REQ
0V
*IO
0V

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

26
1
27
2
28
3
29
4
30
5
31
6
32
7
33
8
34
9
35
10
36
11
40
15
41
16
42
17
43
18
44
19
45
20
46
21
47
22
48
23
49
24
50
25

293

*D0
0V
*D1
0V
*D2
0V
*D3
0V
*D4
0V
*D5
0V
*D6
0V
*D7
0V
*DP
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
0V
*ATN
0V
0V
0V
*BSY
0V
*ACK
0V
*RST
0V
*MSG
0V
*SEL
0V
*CD
0V
*REQ
0V
*IO
0V

8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

B62073E/04

NOTE

EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

We recommend appropriate use of the emergency stop signal when


designing a safe machine tool.
The emergency stop signal is for stopping the machine tool in an
emergency, and is input to the CNC controller, servo amplifier and spindle
amplifier. Generally, Bcontact pushbutton switches are used for the
emergency stop signal.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is closed, the CNC
controller is set to an emergency stop canceled state, and the servo
amplifier and spindle motor can be controlled and operated.
When the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact is open, the CNC
controller is reset to an emergency stop state, and the servo amplifier and
spindle motor are decelerated and stopped.
In the case of the servo motor, the drive power supply of the servo
amplifier is turned OFF to activate a dynamic brake and stop servo motor
operation. Since gravity causes the servo motor used for the gravity shaft
to continue operation, you must consider using a servo motor with a
brake.
In the case of the spindle motor, if the drive power supply of the spindle
amplifier is suddenly turned OFF turning spindle operation, inertia causes
the spindle to continue operation, which is more dangerous. The spindle
motor must be controlled in such a way that deceleration and stopping of
spindle motor operation is confirmed before its drive power supply is
turned OFF when the emergency stop signal (*ESP) contact has become
open.
The above have been taken into consideration in FANUCs series of
control amplifiers. On these control amplifiers, input the emergency stop
signal to the power supply module (PSM). Since the drive power supply
MCC control signal is output from the PSM, use this signal to control
ON/OFF switching of the drive power supply that is input to the power
supply module.
Detection of overtravel by the software limit function is included in the
basic specifications of this CNC controller, and limit switches for regular
detection of overtravel are not required. However, if a malfunction in the
servo feedback system causes the machine tool to move beyond the
software limits, provide stroke end limit switches so that the emergency
stop signal functions to stop the machine tool.
Figure 8 shows a example of how the emergency stop signal is connected
when this CNC controller and an series control amplifier are used.

294

8. EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL

B62073E/04

Stroke end limit switch

Emergency
stop button

Relay power
supply
Release switch
Spark killer

Relay

I/O unit connected to CNC


(module)

series control amplifier (PSM)

External power
supply

Spark killer

Coil

Breaker 1

MCC

AC reactor

Fig. 8

NOTE
When the amplifier is connected to a spindle motor made by
another manufacturer, a sequence for safely decelerating
and stopping the spindle motor when the emergency stop
signal contact becomes open during spindle motor
operation must be incorporated referring to the instruction
manual for the spindle motor.

295

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Fig. 1 (a)

External view of 3slot control unit

Fig. 1 (b)

External view of 4slot control unit

Fig. 1 (c)

External view of 6slot control unit

Fig. 1 (d)

External view of 8slot control unit

Fig. 2 (a)

External view of horizontal type 9I CRT/MDI unit, (Small type,


monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9I PDP/MDI unit, (Small type)

Fig. 2 (b)

External view of horizontal type 9 small CRT/MDI unit (color CRT)

Fig. 2 (c)

External view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard,


monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9 PDP/MDI unit (standard)

Fig. 2 (d)

External dimensions of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit


(standard, monochrome CRT)

Fig. 2 (e)

External view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard, color)

Fig. 2 (f)

External view of horizontal type 9.5 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]
External view of horizontal type 10.4 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5
kg]

Fig. 2 (g)

External view of horizontal type 9.5 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0 kg]
External view of horizontal type 10.4 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0
kg]

Fig. 2 (h)

14 CRT/MDI unit (horizontal)

Fig. 2 (i)

14 CRT/MDI unit (vertical)

Fig. 2 (j)

9 separate type CRT unit (monochrome CRT) 9 separate type


PDP unit

Fig. 2 (k)

9 separate type CRT unit (color)

Fig. 2 (l)

Separate type MDI unit (standard)

Fig. 2 (m)

External dimensions of separate type 10.4 LCD unit

Fig. 2 (n)

External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (horizontal)


(for separate type LCD with builtin graphic function)

Fig. 2 (p)

External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (vertical)


(for separate type LCD with builtin graphic function)

Fig. 2 (q)

External dimensions
(monochrome STN)

Fig. 3 (a)

External view of control transformer (A80L00010176)

Fig. 3 (b)

Description of control transformer

331

of

separate

type

9.5

LCD

unit

A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Fig. 4 (a)

External view of position coder A or B


A86L00260001#102: Max. 4000 rpm
A86L00260001#002: Max. 6000rpm

Fig. 4 (b)

External dimensions of position coder A8600309T302: Max.


10,000 rpm

Fig. 5 (a)

External view of manual pulse generator A8600202T001

Fig. 5 (b)

External view of pendant type manual pulse generator


A8600202T004 to T015

Fig. 6

External view of FANUC PPR

Fig. 7 (a)

External view of punch panel (CE marking noncompliant)

Fig. 7 (b)

External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)

Fig. 7 (c)

External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)

Fig. 8

External view of floppy cassette adapter

Fig. 9

External view of FANUC Handy File

Fig. 10

External view of portable tape reader

Fig. 11

External view of tape reader without reels (serial interface)

Fig. 12

External view of tape reader with reels

Fig. 13 (a)

External view of input unit (A14B0076B001)

Fig. 13 (b)

External view of input unit (Multiple axis) (A14B0076B401)

Fig. 13 (c)

External dimensions of input unit (multiaxis machine)


(A14B0076B402)

Fig. 13 (d)

External view of expanded power input unit (A14B0076B209)

Fig. 14 (a)

External view of PCR connector (soldering type)

Fig. 14 (b)

External view of FI40 connector

Fig. 15 (a)

External view of connector case (HONDA, PCR type)

Fig. 15 (b)

External view of connector case (HIROSE FI20CV2 type)

Fig. 15 (c)

External view of connector case (FUJITSU, FCN type)

Fig. 15 (d)

External view of connector case (HIROSE FI20CV type)

Fig. 16 (a)

External view of AMP connector (11781283)

Fig. 16 (b)

External view of AMP connector (21781296)

Fig. 16 (c)

External view of AMP connector (21782883)

Fig. 16 (d)

External view of AMP connector (11782883)

Fig. 16 (e)

External view of AMP connector (11751962/5, 1752182/5)

Fig. 17 (a)

External view of HONDA connector (case)

Fig. 17 (b)

External view of HONDA connector (female)

Fig. 17 (c)

External view of HONDA connector (male)

332

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

A. LIST OF EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Fig. 17 (d)

External view of HONDA connector (terminal layout)

Fig. 18 (a)

External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)

Fig. 18 (b)

External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, brown)

Fig. 18 (c)

External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, white)

Fig. 18 (d)

External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, brown)

Fig. 18 (e)

External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, white)

Fig. 19 (a)

External view of reader puncher panel connector

Fig. 19 (b)

External view of reader puncher connector metal fitting for lock

Fig. 20

External view of power receptacle for portable tape reader

Fig. 21

External view of battery case for absolute pulse coder

Fig. 22

External View of the Extension Adaptor Unit for Series 15B


(MMCII)

Fig. 23

External View of the Keyboard for Series 15B (MMCII)

Fig. 24

External view of the hard disk unit for Series 15B (MMCII)

Fig. 25

External view of the Portable 5 Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15B
(MMCII)

Fig. 26

External view of the Portable 3.5 Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15B
(MMCII)

Fig. 27

External view of the Portable Cassette Streamer Unit for Series


15B (MMCII) (A08B0047C071)

333

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Weight: 2.3 kg

Fig. 1 (a) External view of 3slot control unit

334

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Weight: 2.5 kg

Fig. 1 (b) External view of 4slot control unit

335

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Weight: 3.8 kg

Fig. 1 (c) External view of 6slot control unit

336

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Weight: 5.0 kg

Fig. 1 (d) External view of 8slot control unit

337

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Panel cut drawing

85 (PDP)
220 (Monochrome CRT)

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the
outer periphery on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Weight: 4.0 kg

Fig. 2 (a) External view of horizontal type 9I CRT/MDI unit, (Small type, monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9I PDP/MDI unit, (Small type)

Panel cut drawing

Unit support
(for reference)
An appropriate support for the
CRT unit should be provided.

Weight: 8 kg

Fig. 2 (b) External view of horizontal type 9 small CRT/MDI unit (color CRT)

338

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Panel cut drawing

85 (PDP)
220 (Monochrome CRT)

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the
outer periphery on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Weight: 4.0 kg

Fig. 2 (c) External view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard, monochrome CRT)
External view of horizontal type 9 PDP/MDI unit (standard)

339

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Panel cut drawing

Weight: 5 kg

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the
outer periphery on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (d) External dimensions of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard, monochrome CRT)

340

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Panel cut drawing

Unit support
(for reference)

Weight: 8 kg

An appropriate support for the


CRT unit should be provided.

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the
outer periphery on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (e) External view of horizontal type 9 CRT/MDI unit (standard, color)

Panel cut drawing

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (f) External view of horizontal type 9.5 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]
External view of horizontal type 10.4 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 4.5 kg]

341

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Panel cut drawing

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (g) External view of horizontal type 9.5 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0 kg]
External view of horizontal type 10.4 LCD/MDI unit [Weight; 5.0 kg]

342

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

Fig. 2 (h) 14 CRT/MDI unit (horizontal)

343

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

VIEW FROM REAR SIDE


8f 4.8

Panel cut drawing

Weight: 20 kg

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (i) 14 CRT/MDI unit (vertical)

344

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Panel cut drawing

85 (PDP)
220 (Monochrome CRT)

Weight: 3.5 kg
CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (j) 9 separate type CRT unit (monochrome CRT)


9 separate type PDP unit

345

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Panel cut drawing

Weight: 8 kg

Fig. 2 (k) 9 separate type CRT unit (color)

346

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Panel cut drawing

Weight: 0.5 kg

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (l) Separate type MDI unit (standard)

347

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

Panel cut drawing

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (m) External dimensions of separate type 10.4 LCD unit

348

B62073E/04

Weight: 2 kg

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Panel cut drawing

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (n) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (horizontal)


(for separate type LCD with builtin graphic function)

349

Weight: 1 kg

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Panel cut drawing

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (p) External dimensions of separate type MDI unit (vertical)


(for separate type LCD with builtin graphic function)

350

Weight: 1 kg

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Weight: 2 kg

Panel cut drawing

CE marking compliant products are masked by an 8 mm wide paint band from the outer periphery
on the rear of the operators panel PCB.

Fig. 2 (q) External dimensions of separate type 9.5 LCD unit (monochrome STN)

351

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

CAUTION
TURN MAIN LINE SWITCH OFF BEFORE HANDLING TB1 OR
TB2

Max. 175

Max. 155

Weight: 14 kg
Unit:
mm

Fig. 3 (a) External view of control transformer (A80L00010176)

352

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Specification of control transformer


(1) Primary side rated voltage
AC200V/220V/230V/380V/415V/440V/460V/480V/550V
(2) Voltage fluctuation
Primary side rated voltage 15%
(3) Frequency
50Hz/60Hz3Hz
(4) Secondary side line voltage
See the figure below.
(5) Secondary side voltage deviation
Less than 3%
(6) Secondary side voltage regulation
Less than 7%
(7) Transformer ambient temperature and humidity
5C+60C 10 to 95% (Relative humidity)
TB1

550
480
460

200 to 550V

440

415
380
240
230
220
200

COM

TB1

200A

200V

100A

100V

200B
100B

Fig. 3 (b) Description of control transformer

353

5A

1A

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Connector

Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:


(1) Input axis inertia
1.0 103 kgcmsec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque
1000 gcm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads
Radial

Thrust

Operation

1 kg or less

1 kg or less

Idle

20 kg or less

10 kg or less

Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive the
timing belt. Confirm that the loads conform with the above
allowable value.
(4) Weight: 1 kg or less

Unit: mm

Fig. 4 (a) External view of position coder A or B A86L00260001#102: Max. 4000 rpm
A86L00260001#002: Max. 6000rpm

354

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

MS connector: MS3102A2029P

Note: Mechanical specifications of the position coder are as follows:


(1) Input axis inertia
1.0 103 kgcmsec2 or less
(2) Input axis starting torque
1000 gcm or less
(3) Input axis permissible loads
Radial

Thrust

Operation

10 kg or less

5 kg or less

Idle

20 kg or less

10 kg or less

Attach a pulley directly to the position coder shaft and drive the
timing belt. Confirm that the loads conform with the above
allowable value.
(4) Weight: Approx. 750 g

Unit: mm

Fig. 4 (b) a External dimensions of position coder A8600309T302: Max. 10,000 rpm

355

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

3 holes equally spaced on a 72 dia

M3 screw terminal

Fig. 5(a) External view of manual pulse generator


A8600202T001

356

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

(1) A8600202T004 to T009

M3 screw terminal

M3 screw terminal

(2) A8600202T010 to T015

M3 screw terminal

M3 screw terminal

Fig. 5 (b) External view of pendant type manual pulse generator


A8600202T004 to T015

357

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Cable length:
Weight:
Unit:

Fig. 6 External view of FANUC PPR

358

1.5 m
about 12 kg
mm

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

4-M3

B62073E/04

Color: PMEN1.53G

4- f 3.6

Japan Aviation
Electronic
DBM-25S

Length: 200 mm

For crimp terminal M4


for frame grounding

Honda Tsushin
Connector: PCR-E20FS
Cover:
PCS-E20LA

Panel cutout

Fig. 7 (a) External view of punch panel (CE marking noncompliant)

NOTE
A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.

359

APPENDIX

Japan Aviation Electronic


DBM-25S

Length: 200 mm

For crimp terminal


M4 for frame grounding

Honda Tsushin
Connector: PCR-E20FS
Cover:
PCS-E20LA
4- f 3.6

External dimensions of wide type

B62073E/04

Panel cutout

Paint masking area on punch panel side

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Fig. 7 (b) External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)

NOTE
1 The touch panel has been designed so that its cover can be locked with screws to ensure dust
and waterproofing.
2 To comply with EMC directives and safety standards, the locker attached to the touch panel
must be electrically connected. So, the edge of the touch panel PCB has been masked with
a paint band to make it electrically conductive.
3 When the touch panel is used as a CE marking compliant product, mask the touch panel on the
locker side to make it electrically conductive. Use conductive packing when attach the touch panel.
4 A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.

360

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

External dimensions of thin type

Japan Aviation Electronic


DBM-25S

Length: 200 mm

For crimp terminal


M4 for frame grounding

Honda Tsushin
Connector: PCR-E20FS
Cover:
PCS-E20LA

Panel cutout

Paint masking area on punch panel side

B62073E/04

Fig. 7 (c) External dimensions of punch panel (CE marking compliant)

NOTE
1 The touch panel has been designed so that its cover can be locked with screws to ensure dust
and waterproofing.
2 To comply with EMC directives and safety standards, the locker attached to the touch panel
must be electrically connected. So, the edge of the touch panel PCB has been masked with
a paint band to make it electrically conductive.
3 When the touch panel is used as a CE marking compliant product, mask the touch panel on the
locker side to make it electrically conductive. Use conductive packing when attach the touch panel.
4 A ground terminal is required near the punch panel for connecting with the frame ground.

361

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

Fig. 8 External view of floppy cassette adapter

362

B62073E/04

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Cable length: 3.0 mm


Weight:
1.4 kg
Unit:
mm

Fig. 9 External view of FANUC Handy File

363

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

Paint:
Munsell No. 5GY3.5/0.5 leather tone finish
Weight: About 15 kg

Fig. 10 External view of portable tape reader

364

B62073E/04

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

AUTO
RELEASE
MANUAL

Wiring screw M3 6

Power
terminal strip

Signal cable

View from
arrow A

Cable holder

4 f 5.3

Signal cable connector


(Panel installation hole
layout diagram)
Coating Color: Metallic silver
Weight:
6 kg
Unit:
mm

Fig. 11 External view of tape reader without reels (serial interface)

NOTE
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and nuts.
If this is not convenient, attach a M5 stud in f 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.

296

B62073E/04

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

AUTO

REEL ON

ALARM

RELEASE
REEL OFF

FORWARD STOP REWIND

View from arrow

fA

M5 10
Stud

4 f 5.3
RS232C
interface connector
Power connector

(Panel installation hole


layout diagram)
Parallel interface
connector
Coating Color: Metallic silver
Weight:
9 kg
Unit:
mm

Fig. 12 External view of tape reader with reels

NOTE
Install the tape reader, from the rear side of panel with holes and secure with screws and nuts.
If this is not convenient, attach a M5 stud in f 5.3 hole and secure with a nut.

297

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

Fig. 13 (a) External view of input unit


(A14B0076B001)

298

B62073E/04

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Fig. 13 (b) External view of input unit (Multiple axis)


(A14B0076B401)

299

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

(AC INPUT)

Key location

15B INPUT Unit PCB

Connector arrangement on the PCB

CPD1 (AC OUTPUT)

F11 (AC INPUT FUSE)


F12 (AC INPUT FUSE)
F13 (DC OUTPUT FUSE)
CPD2A (POWER CONTROL)

CPD2B (POWER CONTROL)

CPD2C (POWER CONTROL)

LED of pilot lamp (Green)


LED of alarm lamp (Red)

Fig. 13 (c) External dimensions of input unit (multiaxis machine)


(A14B0076B402)

300

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Screw for grounding (M4)

APPENDIX

Screw terminal block (M4)

B62073E/04

Fig. 13 (d) External view of expanded power input unit


(A14B0076B209)

301

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

TYPE:

HONDA PCRE20FS (SOLDERING TYPE)

USAGE:

GENERAL

MATING: HONDA PCSE20LA (METAL)


HOUSING: HONDA PCSV20L (PLASTIC)

Display
HONDA

PCRE20FS

21.65

11.43

Fig. 14 (a) External view of PCR connector (soldering type)

302

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

TYPE:

HIROSE FI402015S

USAGE:

PULSE CODER INTERFACE


LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MPG INTERFACE

MATING/HOUSING:

HIROSE FI20CV

Tab for
shield
connec
tion

Section AA

Fig. 14 (b) External view of FI40 connector

303

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

TYPE:

HONDA PCRV20LA (for 6 dia. cable)


PCRV20LB (for 8 dia. cable)

USAGE:

GENERAL





 Case
 Cable clamp
 Lock bracket
 Lock lever
 Set screw for cable clamp

Fig. 15 (a) External view of connector case (HONDA, PCR type)

304

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

TYPE:

HIROSE FI20CV2

USAGE:

GENERAL

 Case
 Cable clamp
 Lock bracket
 Lock lever
 Set screw for cable clamp





Fig. 15 (b) External view of connector case (HIROSE FI20CV2 type)

305

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

TYPE:

FUJITSU FCN240C 20Y/S (for 5.8 dia. cable)

USAGE:

GENERAL

Cable clamp
Screw

Lock lever

Fig. 15 (c) External view of connector case (FUJITSU, FCN type)

306

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

TYPE:

HIROSE FI20CV

USAGE:

PULSE CODER INTERFACE


LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE
MANUAL PULSE GENERATOR INTERFACE

 Case
 Lock bracket
 Lock lever
 Cable clamp
 Set screw for cable clamp







Fig. 15 (d) External view of connector case (HIROSE FI20CV type)

307

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

TYPE:

B62073E/04

AMP 11781283

USAGE:
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
200VAC INPUT

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


200VAC OUTPUT

10I LCD/MDI UNIT

CP1

CP1
CP2

CP11

200B

200A

200B

200A

Circuit No.

Circuit No.

Fig. 16 (a) External view of AMP connector (11781283)

308

Key location

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

TYPE:

AMP 21781296

USAGE:
POWER SUPPLY UNIT
ON/OFF CONTROL

CP4

B3

FB

A3

COM

B2

FA

A2

OFF

B1

AL

A1

ON

Circuit No.

Circuit No.

Fig. 16 (b) External view of AMP connector (21781296)

309

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

TYPE:

B62073E/04

AMP 21782883

USAGE:

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


+24V OUTPUT

CP5

0V

+24V

Circuit No.

Circuit No.

Fig. 16 (c) External view of AMP connector (21782883)

310

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

TYPE:

AMP 11782883

USAGE:

POWER SUPPLY UNIT


+24E OUTPUT

CP6

0V

+24E

Circuit No.

Circuit No.

Fig. 16 (d) External view of AMP connector (11782883)

311

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

TYPE:

AMP 11752182 (Gold coated)


AMP 11752185 (Tin coated)

Reel:

AMP 11751962 (Gold coated)


AMP 11751965 (Tin coated)

WIRE:

AWG 16, 18, 20

B62073E/04

In case of reel

PLATING IDMARK

PRESSER IDMARK

Fig. 16 (e) External view of AMP connector (11751962/5, 1752182/5)

312

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Symbol

(B)

(D)

Number of
terminals

39.3

44.9

39.8

17

20

67.9

73.5

44.8

18

50

Specification

MR20LMH (Plug)
MR20LFH

(Jack)

MR50LMH (Plug)
MR50LFH

(Jack)

Symbol

Outer diameter of the cable


MR20L dia. 10 mm
max
ME50L dia. 16 mm max

Name

Connector cover

Cable clamp

Stopper

Screw for cable clamp


Plug (MR20, 50MH)

Jack (MR20, 50FH)

Fig. 17 (a) External view of HONDA connector (case)

313

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Number of
terminals

MR20RHF

32.8

27.8

20

MR50RHF

61.4

56.4

50

Symbol

Name

Cable clamp

Screw 2.6 dia. 8

Connector (MR20, 50FH)

Fig. 17 (b) External view of HONDA connector (female)

314

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Number of
terminals

MR20RMH

32.8

27.8

20

MR50RMH

61.4

56.4

50

Symbol

Name

Cable clamp

Screw 2.6 dia. 8

Connector (MR20, 50FH)

Fig. 17 (c) External view of HONDA connector (male)

315

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

MR50MH
(50core, plug)

MR50FH
(50core, plug)

MR20MH
(20core, plug)

MR20FH
(20core, plug)

Fig. 17 (d) External view of HONDA connector (terminal layout)

316

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Manufacturer: FCI Japan

Name

Connector housing for cable

Specification
(Connector maker
number)

SMS3PK5

Black

(Crimp type)

RC16M23T3

(Solder type)

RC16MSCT3

For details on tools required


for crimp terminals, contact
the manufacturer.

Contact

Cables:

Remarks

Cross sectional area:


Insulation diameter:
Peeling length:

0.75 mm2 (30/0.18)


2.8 mm max
7.2 mm

Fig. 18 (a) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, black)

317

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Manufacturer: FCI Japan

Name

Connector housing for cable

Specification
(Connector maker
number)

SMS3PNS5

Brown

(Crimp type)

RC16M23T3

(Solder type)

RC16MSCT3

For details on tools required


for crimp terminals, contact
the manufacturer.

Contact

Cables:

Remarks

Cross sectional area:


Insulation diameter:
Peeling length:

0.75 mm2 (30/0.18)


2.8 mm max
7.2 mm

Fig. 18 (b) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, brown)

318

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Manufacturer: FCI Japan

Name

Connector housing for cable


(Crimp type)

Specification
(Connector maker
number)

SMS3PWS5

White

RC16M23D28

For details on tools required


for crimp terminals, contact
the manufacturer.

Contact

Cables:

Cross sectional area:


Insulation diameter:
Peeling length:

Remarks

0.75 mm2 (30/0.18)


2.8 mm max
7.2 mm

Fig. 18 (c) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (3 pins, white)

319

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Manufacturer: FCI Japan

Name

Connector housing for cable

Specification
(Connector maker
number)

SMS6PN5

Brown

(Crimp type)

RC16M23T3

(Solder type)

RC16MSCT3

For details on tools required


for crimp terminals, contact
the manufacturer.

Contact

Cables:

Remarks

Cross sectional area:


Insulation diameter:
Peeling length:

1.27 mm2 (50/0.18)


2.8 mm max
7.2 mm

Fig. 18 (d) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, brown)

320

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Manufacturer: FCI Japan

Name

Connector housing for cable


(Crimp type)

Specification
(Connector maker
number)

SMS6PW5

White

RC16M23T28

For details on tools required


for crimp terminals, contact
the manufacturer.

Contact

Cables:

Cross sectional area:


Insulation diameter:
Peeling length:

Remarks

1.27 mm2 (50/0.18)


2.8 mm max
7.2 mm

Fig. 18 (e) External view of connector made by FCI Japan (6 pins, white)

321

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

A
B

53.0
38.3

D
E

17.8
12.6

G 10.7
H 11.2

47.0

41.3

AA
cross section

23.05 f

Fig. 19 (a) External view of reader puncher panel connector


M2.6 P0.45 screw

Interlock
screw

Small round
head screw
1.2 groove

Spring washer

Fig. 19 (b) External view of reader puncher connector metal fitting for lock

Color: Cream

Fig. 20 External view of power receptacle for portable tape reader

NOTE
When connecting with crimp terminal, use M4 terminal (all 3 poles)

322

10.8

B62073E/04

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

Minus polarity indication


4M4 counter sinking

Plus polarity indication

Plus terminal with


3M3 screw holes

Minus terminal with


3M3 screw holes

4f 4.3 Mounting holes

Arrow view A

Fig. 21 External view of battery case for absolute pulse coder

323

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Fig. 22 External View of the Extension Adaptor Unit for Series 15B (MMCII)

NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof.
2 Ambient temperature during operation: 0C to 40C
3 Weight: 1 kg

Tilt mechanism

Fig. 23 External View of the Keyboard for Series 15B (MMCII)

NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof.
2 A 0.6m signal cable is attached.
3 Ambient temperature during operation: 0C to 40C
4 Weight: 2.5 kg

324

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Air flow
2f 5.8

Fig. 24 External view of the hard disk unit for Series 15B (MMCII)

NOTE
1 This is not dustproof type. Build in to the magnetics cabinet of an enclosed structure together
with the control unit.
2 Ambient temperature at operation: 5C to 55C
3 Other environmental conditions are the same as in the control unit.
4 Install in the direction of the air flow being upward as shown in the diagram above. Do not install
in the direction of the air flow being sideways.
5 Weight: 3.5 kg

325

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Fig. 25 External view of the Portable 5 Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15B (MMCII)

NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof. Use this unit exclusively for program development.
2 Ambient temperature during operation: 5C to 35C
3 Purchase the floppy disk unit, 1.5m signal cable and 1.6m power supply cable from FANUC.
(A08B0047K822)
4 Weight: 6 kg

326

B62073E/04

APPENDIX

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

Fig. 26 External view of the Portable 3.5 Floppy Disk Unit for Series 15B (MMCII)

NOTE
1 This unit is not dustproof. It should be used for program development only.
2 Maintain an operating ambient temperature range of 5C to 35C.
3 The floppy disk unit, and the 1.5m signal cable and 1.5m power cable are to be purchased
from FANUC. (A08B0047K822)
4 Weight: 3.5 kg

327

B. EXTERNAL DIMENSIONS

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Fig. 27 External view of the Portable Cassette Streamer Unit for Series 15B (MMCII) (A08B0047C071)

328

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

20PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS AND CABLES

(1) Connector for the PC board


Model: PCREV20MDT manufactured by Honda Tsushin
The connector for the PC board has been specially developed support
FANUCs highmounting density. The one of each makers including
PCR connectors made by Honda Tsushin are compatible with the
mating part of the connector and can be selected for the cable
connection.
(2) Cable connector
The cable connector is separated into a body and a housing. The
connectors available are shown below. Models marked with (*) have
been customized for FANUC; those not so marked are mass produced
as standard products.
Use
Cable
connector

General
purpose
MDI,
IOLINK,
AMP,
SPDL

Connector
body

Housing

Pulse coder,
coaxial cables,
linear scale,
manual pulse
generator

Housing

Connector
model name

Case model
name

HONDA
Tsushin

PCRE20FA

PCRV20LA*
PCSE20LA

f 6mmf (5.7 to 6.5)f


6mmf (5.7 to 6.5)

HIROSE
Electric

FI3020S*

FI20CV2*

f 6.2mm (f 5.5 to 6.5)

FUJITSU

FCN247J020
G/E

FCN240C020
Y/S*

f 5.8mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

Mores

526222011*

526242015*

f 6.2mm (f 5.9 to 6.5)

HONDA
Tsushin

PCRE20FS

PCRV20LA*
PCSE20LA

f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)


f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

HIROSE
Electric

FI4020S*
FI40B20S*
(FI40A20S*)

FI20CV2*
FI20CV5*

f 6.2mm (f 5.5 to 6.5)


f 9.2mm (f 8.9 to 9.5)

FI40B20S*

FI20CV6*

f 10.25mm (f 9.5 to 11.0)

FI40B2015S*
(FI402015S*)

FI20CV*

f 8.5mm (f 8.0 to 9.0)

FI40B20S*
(FI40A20S*)

FI20CV5*

f 9.2mm (f 8.9 to 9.5)

FI40B20S*

FI20CV6*

f 10.25mm (f 9.5 to 11.0)

PCRE20FS

PCRV20LA*
PCSE20LA

f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)


f 6mm (f 5.7 to 6.5)

Manufacturer

Type

HIROSE
Electric

HONDA
Tsushin

Applicable
cable O.D.

Fig. C (a) Cable connectors

NOTE
Use the same makers connector body and housing to
combine them.

365

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

(3) Required tools for Connection of cable connector


(a) Separatewire pressmount type
Connector: PCRE20FA (Honda Tsushin)
28AWG wires are assembled at a time. Generally, it is much more
cost effective to assemble a cable this way than by using solder or
pressmount type connectors. Inquire the each connector maker about
the connection tools.
(b) Solder type
Connector: PCRE20FS (Honda Tsushin) or
FI402015S (Hirose)
Wires of 20 AWG or smaller can be soldered to the Honda Tsushin
connector. However, soldering many of these wires together lowers
work efficiency because the pitch of the soldering portion of the
connector is too small to support it.
To increase work efficiency Hirose has developed a new connector.
By thinning out the number of pins, its soldering portion has a pitch
equal to that of the conventional Honda MF connectors. The
FI402015S can be used for interfacing pulse coders and manual pulse
generators which require wires up to as 20 AWG thick for connection
with a +5 V power source.
The following table describes the details of soldered connectors and
cases.
Table C (a) Details of soldered connectors and cases.

D Connector

Connector model (manufacturer)

Description

PCRE20FS (HONDA Tsushin)

Soldered connector for generalpurpose applications compatible with smalllot


cable assemblies and cable assemblies at the site.

FI420S (HIROSE Electric)

HONDA Tsushin PCRE20FS or equivalent product

FI40B20S (HIROSE Electric)


(previously FI40A20S)

This connector has the same number of pins as the FI4020S, and has a wider row
alignment at its soldering section for facilitating soldering which makes it more
suitable for soldering thick electrical leads. This connector features higher terminal
strength over the FI40A20S (suitable for soldering electrical leads up to #20AWG
thick) and is suitable for electrical leads up to #17AWG thick. Note, however, that
when thick electrical leads such as #17AWG are used, we recommend using higher
strength case such as the FI20CV6.

FI40B2015S (HIROSE Electric)


(previously FI40A2015S)

This connector utilizes the space obtained by skipping some of the pins to produce
a wider pitch at the soldering section. The FI40B2015S is an improved version of
the F1402015S, and features higher terminal strength. This allows electrical leads
up to #17AWG in cables having an outside diameter of up to 8.5 mm to be partially
soldered.

D Case

Case model (manufacturer)

Description

FI20CV5 (HIROSE Electric)

This plastic case is recommended for the FI40B20S, and is suitable for cables up
to outside diameter 9.2 mm.

FI20CV6 (HIROSE Electric)

This diecast metal case has been developed for the FI40B20S, and is suitable for
thick cables up to outside diameter 10.25 mm.

366

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

When cases and soldered connectors made by HIROSE Electric are used
in combination, you can select combinations shown in the figure below
in addition to those describes in Figure C(a). However, the outside
diameter of cables used must be compatible with the applicable outsider
diameter of the case.
Connector model
FI40B2015S
(previously FI402015S)

FI4020S
FI40B20S
(previously FI40A20S)

Case model (applicable cable O.D.)


FI20CV (f 8.5 mm dia.) only compatible

FI20CV2 (f 6.2 mm)


FI20CV5 (f 9.2 mm)
FI20CV6 (f 10.25 mm)

These connectors and


cases are mutually
compatible.

(4) Recommended connectors, compatible housings and compatible


cables

Table C (b) List of recommended connectors, compatible housings and compatible cables

Name of connector in
connection manual

PCRE20FA
Connector body

FANUC authorized
connector
(manufacturer)

FCRE20FA
(HONDA Tsushin)

FANUC
authorized
housing (=case)
(manufacturer)

PCRV20AL
(HONDA Tsushin)

Compatible cable
(cable O.D.)
FANUC developed
product
FANUC specification No.

A66L00010284#10P
(O.D. 6.2 mm dia.)

Remarks

Plastic

PCSE20LA
(HONDA Tsushin)

Metal

FI3020S
(HIROSE Electric)

FI20CV2
(HIROSE Electric)

Plastic

FCN247J020G/E
(FUJITSU Takamisawa)

FCN240C020Y/
S
(FUJITSU
Takamisawa)

Plastic

526222011
(Morex)

526242015
(Morex)

Plastic

FCRE20FS
(HONDA Tsushin)

PCRV20LA
(HONDA Tsushin)

Plastic

PCSE20LA
(HONDA Tsushin)

Metal

FI4020S
(HIROSE Electric)

FI20CV2
(HIROSE Electric)

Plastic

FI40B2015S
(previously FI402015S)
15pin soldered type

FI40B2015S
(previously FI402015S)
(HIROSE Electric)

FI20CV
(HIROSE Electric)

A66L00010286 (Note)
A66L00010402 (Note)
(O.D. 8.5 mm dia.)

Plastic

FI40B20S
(previously FI40A20S)
Housing

FI40B20S
(previously FI40A20S)
(HIROSE Electric)

FI20CV5
(HIROSE Electric)

A66L00010367
A66L00010368
(O.D. 9.2 mm dia.)

Plastic

FI40B20S
(HIROSE Electric)

FI20CV6
(HIROSE Electric)

A66L00010403 (Note)
(O.D. 9.8 mm dia.)

Metal

PCRE20FS
Housing

367

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

NOTE
Up till now we have recommend using pulse coder cable (A66L00010286) up to 20 m in
length. We have developed two new cables: A66L00010402 that can be used up to 30 m,
and A66L00010403 that can be used up to 50 m. (For detailed specifications, see Figure 4.)
These cables (A66L00010402 and A66L00010403) not only demonstrate the same oil
resistance as cable A66L00010286, they are also bendresistant (100 mm dia. cables can
be bent up to one million operations), and comply with UL and CSA standards.
(5) Cable wires
Cable wires generally need to be developed or ordered by the machine
tool builder for the Series 15B/16/18.
FANUC has developed wires that specifically suit the interface
connector of the Series 15B/16/18. They are listed in the table below,
for your convenience when ordering from the manufacturer.
(In addition to these, a cable for moving parts is under development.)

Cable type

Use

Structure

FANUC
specification No.

Manufacturer

Remarks

10pair cable

General purpose

Ten 0.08mm2
pairs

A66L00010284#10P

Hitachi Cable,
Oki Electric Cable

6core coaxial
cable

CRT interface

Coaxial six
cores

A66L00010296

Hitachi Cable

50 m maximum

Composite
12core cable
(Note 2)

Pulse coders, linear Six 0.5mm2


A66L00010286
scales, and manual wires and three
pulse generators
0.18mm2 pairs

Hitachi Cable,
Oki Electric Cable

20 m maximum
(Note 2)

NOTE
For the pulse coder, scale, and manual pulse generator, each of which has a +5V power
supply, wires need to be selected taking into consideration the supply voltage drop caused by
the resistance of the cable.
A66L00010286 has been designed for use with a cable length of 20 mm or less. If the cable
length exceeds 20 m, connect A66L00010286 to a cable with a lower resistance, such as
A66L00010157.
The number of manual pulse generators to be connected is assumed to be three. If only one
generator is connected, the cable can be extended to a maximum of 50 m by connecting wires
with in parallel a crosssectional area of 0.5 mm2 for the power supply.

368

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

(6) 10pair cable

(a) Specifications

Item

Unit

Specifications

Product No.

A66L00010284#10P

Manufacturer

Hitachi Cable, Ltd.


Oki Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

Rating

60_C 30 V: UL2789
80_C 30 V: UL80276

Conductor

Stranded wire of tinned annealed copper (ASTM B286)

Insulator

Crosslinked vinyl

Shield braid

Tinned annealed copper wire

Sheath

Heatresistant oilproof vinyl

Material

Number of pairs
Conductor

Pairs

10

AWG

28

Conductors/
mm

7/0.127

Outside diameter

mm

0.38

Thickness

mm

0.1
Thinnest portion: 008 (3.1 mm)

Outside diameter
(approx.)

mm

0.58

Core style (rating)

mm

UL1571 (80_C, 30V)

Outside diameter
(approx.)

mm

1.16

Pitch

mm

20 or less

Size

Structure

Insulator

Twisted pair

Lay

Lay diameter (approx.)


Drain wire

Shield braid

Sheath

Standard length

Collect the required number of twisted pairs into a cable, then


wrap binding tape around the cable. To make the cable round,
apply a cable separator as required.

mm

3.5

Conductors/ Hitachi Cable:


Not available
mm
Oki Electric Cable: Available, 10/0.12

Element wire
diameter

mm

0.12

Braid density

85 or more

Color

Black

Thickness

mm

1.0

Outside diameter
(approx.)

mm

6.2

200

369

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Item

Unit

Specifications

Bundle

Electric
resistance
(at 20_C)

W/km

233 or less

Insulation
resistance
(at 20_C)

MWkm

10 or more

V/min.

300

Packing method
Electrical
performance

Dielectric strength
(AC)

Flame resistance

Shall pass flame resistance test VW1SC of UL standards.

(b) Indications on the cable


On the surface of the cable, print in indelible ink the ULcertified
component classification mark, UL style no., manufacturers
name, and flame resistance mark.
(c) Cable structure

Wire identification table (Hitachi)


Insulator color

1
10

2
5

3
6
8

4
7

Wire No.

Twistedpair wire
Binding tape
Shield braid
Sheath

First wire

Second wire

1
2
3
4
5
6

Blue
Yellow
Green
Red
Purple
Blue

White
White
White
White
White
Brown

7
8
9
10

Yellow
Green
Red
Purple

Brown
Brown
Brown
Brown

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the number in the table at right.

Fig. C (b) Cable made by Hitachi Cable

370

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Drain wire

10

Twistedpair wire
Binding tape
Shield braid

Sheath


Dot mark
color
Dot
mark
(1 pitch) First Second
wire
wire

Pair
No.

Insulator
color

1
2
3
4
5
6

Orange
Gray
White
Yellow
Pink
Orange

Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red

Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black

7
8
9
10

Gray
White
Yellow
Pink

Red
Red
Red
Red

Black
Black
Black
Black

The numbers assigned to the wires correspond to the number in the table at right.

Fig. C (c) Cable made by Hitachi Cable

(7) Composite 12core cable

(a) Specifications

Item

Unit

Specifications

Product No.

A66L00010286

Manufacturer

Oki Cable, Ltd.


Hitachi Electric Cable Co., Ltd.

Rating

80C, 30 V

Conductor,
braidshielded
wire, drain wire

Strand wire of tinned annealed copper (JIS C 3152)

Insulator

Heatresistant flameretardant vinyl

Sheath

Oilproof, heatresistant, flameretardant vinyl

Material

Number of wires (wire nos.)

Cores

6 (1 to 6)

6 (three pairs) (7 to 9)

Conductor

mm2

0.5

0.18

Conductors/
mm

20/0.18

7/0.18

Outside diameter

mm

0.94

0.54

Standard thickness
(The minimum
thickness is at least
80% of the standard
thickness.)

mm

0.25

0.2

Outside diameter

mm

1.50

0.94

Size

Structure

Insulator

371

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Item

Twisted pair

Outside diameter
Direction of lay
Pitch

Lay

Unit

Specifications

mm

1.88

Left

mm

20 or less

Twist the wires at an appropriate pitch so the outermost layer is


righttwisted, and wrap tape around the outermost layer. Apply a
cable separator as required.

mm

5.7

mm2

0.3

Wires/mm

12/0.18

Outside diameter

mm

0.72

Element wire
diameter

mm

0.12

Thickness

mm

0.3

70

mm

6.3

Black

Standard thickness
(The minimum
thickness is at least
85% of the standard
thickness.)

mm

1.1

Outside diameter

mm

8.5 Max. 9.0 (Note)

Standard length

100

Packing method

Bundle

Lay diameter
Drain wire

Size

Structure

Shield braid

Braid density

Outside diameter

Sheath

Electrical
performance

Color

Electric
resistance (at
20C) (wire nos.)
Insulation
resistance (at
20C)

Dielectric strength
(AC)

Flame resistance

/km

39.4
(1 to 6)

113
(7 to 9)

km

15

V/min.

500

Shall pass flame resistance test VW1SC of UL standards.

NOTE
The maximum outside diameter applies to portions other than the drain wire.

372

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

(b) Markings on cable


(1) Name or symbol of the manufacturer
(2) Manufacturing year
(c) Cable structure
The cable structure is shown below.

Drain wire

Red

White

Red

Binding tape

Black

Black

Shield braid

Red

0.5mm2 insulated wire

Black

Red

Red

0.18mm2 twisted pair wire

Black

Sheath

Black

White

The colors in the figure indicate the colors of insulators.

Item

Specifications

Product No.

A66L00010402

Manufacturer

Conductor

Oki Cable Ltd.

Structure
Conductors/mm
O.D.

Insulator
(polyester)

A66L00010403

mm

Color

Thickness

mm

Outside diameter

A core wire

B core wire

A core wire

B core wire

16/0.12
(0.18 mm2)

3/22/0.12
(0.75 mm2)

16/0.12
(0.18 mm2)

7/16/0.12
(1.25 mm2)

0.55

1.20

0.55

1.70

white, red, black

red, black

white, red, black

red, black

0.16

0.23

0.16

0.25

0.87

1.66

0.87

2.20

mm

Twisted pair

Structure

Direction of lay

whitered,
whiteblack,
blackred

whitered,
whiteblack,
blackred

Left
Pitch typ. 20 mm

Left
Pitch typ. 20 mm

373

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Item

Specifications

Product No.

A66L00010402

Manufacturer
Lay

Oki Cable Ltd.

Number of wires

3 pairs

Direction of lay
Taping
O.D.

Shield braid

Tape the outermost layer with


Japanese paper after twisting.

Tape the outermost layer with


Japanese paper after twisting.

5.7

6.9

0.14

Thickness standard mm

80

Wrap one wire set comprising 12/0.8 mm under the shield braid.

standard mm

6.4

O.D.

Black (matte)

1.05

1.1

Diagonally wrap Japanese paper tape underneath the sheath.

mm

Standard length

8.5" 0.3

9.8" 0.3

Short length

100

In principle, not recognized as a completed product.

Rating

80C 30 V

Standard

Must comply with UL STYLE 20236 and CSA LL43109 AWM I/II A 80C30V
FT1

Fire resistance

Insulation
performance

7.6

Color

Diagonal taping

Electrical
performance

6 cores

Left

Thickness standard mm

Performance of
completed
product

3 pairs

Element wire diameter


standard mm

O.D.

Completed
product

6 cores

Left

standard mm

Drain

Sheath
(polyester)

A66L00010403

Must pass VW1 and FT1.

Electric resistance
W/km (at 20C)

103 max.

25.5 max.

103 max.

Insulation resistance
MW/km (at 20C)

At least 1

Dielectric strength Vmin


.

A.C 500

Tensile strength N/mm2

At least 9.8

Elongation

At least 100

Tensile strength after


aging
%

70% or more of preaging value

Elongation after aging%

65% or more of preaging value

Aging conditions

113C, 168 hours

374

15.0 max.

C. 20-PIN INTERFACE CONNECTORS


AND CABLES

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Item

Specifications

Product No.

A66L00010402

Manufacturer
Sheath
performance

A66L00010403

Oki Cable Ltd.

Tensile strength N/mm2

At least 9.8

Elongation

At least 100

Tensile strength after


aging
%

70% or more of preaging value

Elongation after aging%

65% or more of preaging value

Aging conditions

113C, 168 hours

Cable structure

Binding tape

Shield braid

Pair lead A

Red

Red

Red

Black

Black

Red

Black

Single lead B

Red

Drain wire

Sheath

375

D. ATTACHING THE CRT


PROTECTIVE COVER

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

ATTACHING THE CRT PROTECTIVE COVER

A CRT protective cover must be attached to the 9 monochrome CRT to


comply with CE marking (machine tool) directives.
The 9 monochrome CRT is also provided with a protective cover
(specification : A02B0200K820) between its top surface and rear
surface.

376

D. ATTACHING THE CRT


PROTECTIVE COVER

APPENDIX

B62073E/04

Bottom cover
Insert under panel.

Attaching the bottom cover (viewed from below)

Insert under panel.


Insert between panels.

Side cover

Attaching the side cover (viewed from side)

CRT protective cover

377

Index

B62073E/04

Numbers

Connection between the series 15B (MMCII) and peripheral


units, 275

10.4 LCD display interface (CE marking compliant with


builtin graphic function), 222

Connection diagram, 134


Connection diagram for MMCIV, 92

14 analog CRT, 10.4 LCD, 9.5 LCD display interface (CE


marking compliant when MMCIV is not used), 218

Connection diagram for series 15B (in case of MMCIII), 89,


91

14 analog CRT, 10.4 LCD, 9.5 LCD display interface (CE


marking compliant when MMCIV is used), 220

Connection diagram for series 15MB or series 150MB (in


case of multiple axis), 83

20pin interface connectors and cables, 366

Connection diagram for series 15TB/TTB/MB (when


LCD/MDI unit with builtin graphic functions is used), 77

9 CRT or 9 PDP display interface (CE marking


noncompliant), 214

Connection diagram for series


15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150TB/MB/TTB
(in case of analog spindle), 80

9 CRT or PDP display interface (CE marking compliant), 216

Connection diagram for series


15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150TB/MB/TTB
(in case of serial spindle), 74

A
Additional cabinet (in case of analog spindle interface), 86

Connection diagram for series


15TB/TTB/MB/TFB/TTFB/MFB, series 150TB/MB/TTB
(when LCD/MDI unit with builtin graphic functions is not
used), 74

Additional cabinet (in case of serial spindle interface), 85

Connection of FANUC I/O link by electric cable, 125

Addressfixed signals, 207

Connection of FANUC I/O link by optical fiber cable, 126

Adjusting the flat display, 224

Connection of I/O units to machine interface, 120

ALARM LEDs on source output operators panel connection


unit, 195

Connection of input unit for additional cabinet A, 115

Action against noise, 30

Connection of input unit for standalone cabinet A, 105

Analog spindle interface, 256

Connection of input unit for standalone cabinet B, 110

APC battery interface, 272

Connection of operators panel connection unit, 175

Attaching the CRT protective cover, 377

Connection of reference position approach signal, 247


Connection of source output operators panel connection unit,
189

Connection of tape reader with reels, 235


Connection of tape reader without reels, 234

Battery for memory backup, 44

Connection of the FANUC I/O link, 123


Connection of the FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A, 131
Connection pin assignment addresses of source output
operators panel connection unit, 197

C
Cabinet design and installation conditions of the machine tool
magnetic, 10

Connection to CNC peripherals, 208


Connection to control unit, 114

Cabinet exterior environmental requirements, 7

Connection to input unit (A14B0076B411), 111

Cabinet leadin for standalone cabinet A, 67

Connection to input units (A14B0076B004, B005, and


B008), 105

Cable clamp and shield processing, 37

Connection to the control unit, 109

Cable connection [Connection to the input unit


(A02B0075J141, J142, J144, and J145), 116

Connection with a floppy disk unit for unit FANUC series 15B
(MMCII), 287

Cable leadin for additional cabinet A, 69

Connection with a hard disk unit for FANUC series 15B


(MMCII), 283

Cable leadin for standalone cabinet B, 68


Cable leadindiagram, 47
Configuration, 4

Connection with a printer using the centronics interface for


FANUC series 15B (MMCII), 279

Configuration and installation of the control unit, 40

Connection with an extension adapter unit for FANUC series


15B (MMCII), 281

Configuration of control unit connectors, 47


Connecting connection unit 1 and connection unit 2, 149

Connection with an external device using the RS422 interface


for series 15B (MMCII), 277

Connecting input power source, 135

Connection with the FANUC handy file, 233

Connecting signal cables, 138

Connector layout for operators panel connection unit, 179

Connecting the connection unit, 147

Connector pin assignment for the connection unit, 154

Connecting the power supply unit, 97

Control unit, 40, 84

Connecting with I/O modules, 141

Cooling by heat exchanger, 13

Connection between the control unit and additional locker, 88

Cooling fin A/B/C, 16

i1

INDEX

B62073E/04

Correspondence between I/O signals and address in a module,


145

Input signal regulations for the operators panel connection


unit, 176

CRT/MDI unit interface, 209

Input unit layout, 105, 110, 115


Installation, 6, 24
Installation conditions of the CNC inside cabinet and servo unit,
8

Installing the heat exchanger, 16

Details of machine side connection of source output operators


panel connection unit, 199

Interface between MMCIII board and option 1 board (video


signal), 228

Details of the connection between the connection unit and the


machine, 156

Interface between MMCIV board and option 1 board (video


signal), 225

Details of the connection between the operators panel


connection unit and the machine, 181
Digital input/output module, 143

DNC interface, 248

Keyboard interface, 226

DNC1 interface, 248


DNC2 interface (RS232C), 250
DNC2 interface (RS422), 251

L
Linear scale interface (A/B/Z signal interface), 269
Linear scale interface (serial interface), 271

List of external dimensions, 299

Emergency stop signal, 294


Environmental requirements, 7
External dimensions, 302

External dimensions of source output operators panel


connection unit, 206

Maintenance, 27

External view of operators panel connection unit, 188

Maintenance area, 70

External view of the connection unit, 174

Maintenance area for additional cabinet A, 72


Maintenance area for selfstanding A type cabinet, 70
Maintenance area for selfstanding B type cabinet, 71

Manual pulse generator interface, 238


Mounting and dismounting modules, 132

FANUC cassette connection, 232

Noise suppressor, 36

Generalpurpose analog voltage input interface, 274

Number of I/O points for I/O UnitMODEL A, 145

Ground, 31
Grounding, 136

Grounding each unit, 33

Outer dimensions, 132


Outer hard disk interface (MMCIII), 292

Output signal regulations for the connection unit, 153

Heat exchanger for CRT/MDI unit, 21

Output signal regulations for the operators panel connection


unit, 177

Heat loss of each unit, 14

Output signal standard for source output operators panel


connection unit, 192

Highspeed DI signal interface, 244


Hybridcontrol connections, 273

Portable tape reader connection, 231

I/O device interface, 229

Power capacity, 9

Input signal regulations for the connection unit, 151

Power OFF sequence, 104

i2

INDEX

B62073E/04

Power ON sequence, 104

Servo amp interface, 260

Power supply unit and input unit connection, 94

Servo interface, 259

Power supply unit panel layout, 95

Small 19 keyboard interface, 227

PPR connection, 230

Source output operators panel connection unit input signal


standard, 190

Pulse coder interface, 257

Spindle interface, 252


Structure of FANUC I/O UnitMODEL A, 131

R
Remote buffer interface (RS232C), 240

Remote buffer interface (RS422), 242


Replacing the battery, 45

Temperature rise within the cabinet, 13

RS232C serial port, 229

The heat pipe type heat exchanger, 24

RS232C serial port (MMCIII), 290

Thermal design of the cabinet, 13

RS422 serial port, 236

Total connection, 73

Separating signal lines, 30


Serial pulse coder interface, 263

When AC output terminals for which power on/off is controlled


are insufficient, 103

Serial spindle interface ( series), 255

When an input unit is not used, 97

Serial spindle interface (S series spindle), 254

When an input unit is used, 100

i3

Nov., 98

Feb., 95

Feb., 94

Oct., 92

Date

04

03

02

01

Edition

Contents

The following products are added


D FANUC Series 15-TFB
D FANUC Series 15-TTFB
D FANUC Series 15-MFB
D FANUC Series 15-MB (Multiple axis)

Edition

Date

Series 15/150-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (B62073E)

The following products are added


D FANUC Series 150-TB
D FANUC Series 150-TTB
D FANUC Series 15-MB
Correction of errors

FANUC

Revision Record

Contents

No part of this manual may be


reproduced in any form.

All specifications and designs


are subject to change without
notice.